JP6704770B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachi-slot machine.

Conventionally, for example, in a pachinko machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as when a game ball has passed a starting region provided in a game region in which a shot game ball can roll Is provided with display control means for performing control to variably display a symbol as identification information and controlling to derive and display the symbol that is variably displayed, and the symbol displayed and derived is a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), the player is provided with a big hit game state (so-called “big hit”) that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the pachinko machine, a technique of stacking and arranging a plurality of movable bodies on one surface side of the base member has been proposed (see Patent Document 1). Specifically, the pachinko machine described in Patent Document 1 includes a movable effect device having a first movable body, a second movable body, and a third movable body arranged in front of the base member (on the side of the player). ing. The first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body are appropriately supported by the base member.

JP, 2005-202274, A

However, in the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine, since the plurality of movable bodies are concentrated on one surface side of the base member, the center of gravity of the plurality of movable bodies is far from the base member. Therefore, a large moment of inertia is generated when the plurality of movable bodies operate. This may cause the plurality of movable bodies to swing, and the movable bodies may come into contact with each other.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the occurrence of contact between movable bodies.

Gaming machine according to the present invention includes a first base member possible plate-like plurality of movable body mounting a first movable member mounted on one side of the first base member, said first base A second movable body attached to the other surface side of the member; and a movement control means for controlling the movement of the first movable body and the second movable body, and the first movable body and the second movable body. The movable body can be moved and controlled by the movement control means to a production position that is easily visible to the player and a standby position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the first movable body is moved to the production position. When controlled, it is arranged closer to the player than the first base member, and when the second movable body is controlled to move to the effect position, it is more gaming than the first base member. The first movable body, which is disposed on the inner side, has a second base member, a third movable body movably supported with respect to the second base member, and the second base member. And a drive source for moving the third movable body, the drive source having at least a part of the first base member in the plate thickness direction of the first base member. The feature is that they are arranged at overlapping positions .

Further, as a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the first movable body is composed of a single movable body, and is arranged at the center of the first base member, and the second movable body is It is characterized in that it is composed of a plurality of movable bodies and is arranged as a pair of movable bodies at positions symmetrical with each other.

According to the present invention, the occurrence of contact between movable bodies can be suppressed.

The perspective view showing the appearance in the pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. Similarly, an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance. Similarly, a front view showing the appearance of the game board. Similarly, a front view showing an LED unit including the first and second special symbol display portions. Similarly, the block diagram which shows a main control circuit. Similarly, (a) a table showing the specifications of the special symbol game. (B) A table showing the specifications of the normal symbol game. (C) Table showing distribution per hit. (D) A table showing types per hit. Similarly, a flowchart showing the flow of the game. The flowchart which shows the continuation of FIG. Similarly, a flowchart showing a main process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a system timer interrupt process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart showing the special symbol control processing executed in the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process executed in the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed in the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the special design fluctuation time management processing which is executed with the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process executed in the main control circuit. The flowchart which shows the continuation of FIG. Similarly, a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart showing the special winning opening reopening waiting time management processing executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a hit end interval process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart showing the special symbol game ending process executed in the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a main process executed by the sub control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the sub control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a command analysis process executed by the sub-control circuit. The flowchart which shows the continuation of FIG. The front perspective view which shows an ordinary electric accessory unit. The front exploded perspective view which shows a normal electric accessory unit. The front view of the base member of a normal electric accessory unit. The front perspective view of the base member of an ordinary electric accessory unit. The front cross-sectional view of the ordinary electric accessory unit. The front cross-sectional perspective view of an ordinary electric accessory unit. The front perspective view which shows an attacker unit. The front view which shows an attacker unit. The side view which shows an attacker unit. The top view which shows an attacker unit. The front exploded perspective view showing an attacker unit. The front view which shows the base member of an attacker unit. The rear view which shows the front side board part of an attacker unit. FIG. 3 is a front cross-sectional view showing an attacker unit. The front sectional perspective view of an attacker unit. (A) The top view which shows the special winning opening solenoid. (B) The top view which shows a link arm. (C) The top view which shows a shutter. FIG. 6A is a plan view showing the attacker unit when the shutter is at the second position. (B) Similarly, the top view which shows a special electric accessory. FIG. 6A is a plan view showing the attacker unit when the shutter is at the first position. (B) Similarly, the top view which shows a special electric accessory. (A) A schematic plan view showing how a game ball rolls along a first guide path of an attacker unit. (B) Similarly, the schematic plan view showing the continuation of FIG. 45(a). (C) Similarly, a schematic plan view showing how a plurality of game balls roll. FIG. 3 is a front cross-sectional view showing a mutual positional relationship between a normal electric accessory and an attacker unit. Partial front view showing a game ball rolling in the game area. (A) A front cross-sectional view showing a state in which a game ball rolls through an ordinary electric accessory unit. (B) Similarly, the front sectional view showing the continuation of FIG. Partial front view showing a game ball rolling in the game area. (A) A front sectional view showing how a game ball rolls in an attacker unit. (B) Similarly, the front sectional view showing the continuation of FIG. 50(a). (A) A front sectional view showing how a game ball rolls in an attacker unit. (B) Similarly, the front sectional view showing the continuation of FIG. 51(a). (A) A schematic plan view showing how a game ball rolls on a first guide path of an attacker unit according to another example. (B) Similarly, a schematic side view. (A) A schematic plan view showing a sequel to FIG. 52( a ). (B) Similarly, a schematic side view. The front view which shows a 2nd movable accessory unit. The front view which shows the state which removed the 1st movable body (excluding the base member) from the 2nd movable accessory unit. The front view which shows the state which removed the 1st movable body from the 2nd movable accessory unit. The rear view which shows a 2nd movable accessory unit. The top view which shows a 2nd movable accessory unit. The rear perspective view showing the second movable accessory unit. The rear view which shows a 1st movable body (except a base member). The front disassembled perspective view which shows the movable body of a 1st movable body. The rear view which shows the movement control means of a 1st movable body. The rear view which showed a mode that a movable body was moved to a production position from a standby position. The rear view which shows the 1st movable body (excluding the base member) in the state where a movable body is in a production position. The front exploded perspective view showing the second movable body. The front view which shows a movement control means. The front view which showed the mode that the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body were moved from the standby position to the production position. The front view which showed the state in which the 1st movable body (only base member) and the 2nd movable body are in the production position. The front view which showed the state in which the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body are in the production position. The rear view which showed the state in which the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body are in the production position. The top view which showed the state in which the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body are in the production position. The front schematic diagram which showed the mode of the arm in the state in which a 1st movable body is in a standby position. The front schematic diagram which showed the mode of the arm in the state in which the 1st movable body is in the highest position. The front schematic diagram which showed the mode of the arm in the state in which the 1st movable body is in a production position. The front view which showed the inside (base member and substrate) of the 2nd movable body. The enlarged front view which showed the connector and flat cable of a 2nd movable body. The disassembled perspective sectional view which showed the butted part of the 2nd movable body (SS cross section of FIG. 75). Similarly, a side sectional view (S-S cross section in FIG. 75). The side sectional view showing the detailed shape of the butted portion of the second movable body. (A) The top view which shows the structure of a flat cable. (B) Similarly, a side view. (C) Similarly, a bottom view. The front view which showed the state where the flat cable was normally connected. The front view which showed the state where the flat cable was not connected normally. (A) Side surface sectional drawing which showed the 1st modification of the abutting part of a 2nd movable body. (B) Similarly, the side sectional view showing the second modification. (C) Similarly, a side sectional view showing a third modified example. The front view which showed the inside (base member and substrate) of a movable body. The rear view which showed the board|substrate of a movable body, a connector, and a flat cable. The rear view which showed the base member to which the board|substrate was attached. The rear view which showed the modification of the 2nd movable body. The perspective view showing the production device concerning a first embodiment of the 1st movable accessory unit. Similarly, a front sectional view. Similarly, an exploded perspective view. The perspective view of a drum main body. Similarly, a right front exploded perspective view. Similarly, a left front exploded perspective view. The right view of a base member. The left side view of a reel seat. The right side view showing the base member and the reel seat. A1-A1 sectional view. The right front exploded perspective view showing the production device concerning a modification. Similarly, a right side view showing the base member, the reel seat, and the left mounting member. B1-B1 sectional view. The perspective view showing the production device concerning a second embodiment of the first movable accessory unit. Similarly, a front sectional view. Similarly, an exploded perspective view. The perspective view of a drum main body. Similarly, a right front exploded perspective view. Similarly, a left front exploded perspective view. The right view of a base member. The left side view of a reel seat. The right side view showing the base member and the reel seat. A2-A2 sectional view. The right front exploded perspective view showing the production device concerning a modification. Similarly, a right side view showing the base member, the reel seat, and the left mounting member. B2-B2 sectional view. The perspective view showing the production device concerning a third embodiment of the first movable accessory unit. Similarly, a front sectional view. Similarly, an exploded perspective view. The perspective view of a drum main body. Similarly, a right front exploded perspective view. Similarly, a left front exploded perspective view. The right view of a base member. The left side view of a reel seat. The right side view showing the base member, the reel seat, and the left mounting member. A3-A3 sectional view. B3-B3 sectional view. (A) The right side view which showed the overlapping part which is not pressed by the pressing part. (B) A right side view showing a state in which the overlapping portion is deformed. The front right perspective view showing the game ball distribution device. Similarly, a right front exploded perspective view. Similarly, a right rear exploded perspective view. The rear perspective view showing the base member, the rotation distribution mechanism, the clune, and the guide member. The front exploded perspective view showing the guide member and the pressing member. The figure showing the state where the game balls are distributed to the second passage. The figure which showed the flow of the game ball distributed to the 2nd passage, the 3rd passage, and the 4th passage. The figure showing the state where the game balls are distributed to the first passage. The front perspective view which showed the game ball distribution device. The top view which showed the game ball distribution device which concerns on another embodiment.

[Game machine configuration]
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5.
In the following description, the front-back direction is defined as the front side and the back side as the rear side when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, and the front-back direction is defined. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is the left side and the right-hand side is the right side, and the left-right direction is defined.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a plate unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, a game board 17, a payout unit 18, and a board. The unit 19 is provided.

The wooden frame 11 is a substantially rectangular frame body when viewed from the front. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back surface side, and the glass door 13, the dish unit 14, the launching device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16, and the game board 17 on the front surface side. To support.

The glass door 13 is attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22. A transparent protective glass 23 is provided in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protective glass 23 is arranged so as to face the game board 17, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction when the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. A speaker 24 and a lamp 25 are arranged above the glass door 13. The speaker 24 is, for example, a device that gives a voice notification, effects, and error notification. The lamp 25 is, for example, for making a notification by light or producing an effect.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The dish unit 14 is disposed below the glass door 13 at the lower front portion of the base door 12.

The upper plate 26 is for storing game balls to be shot in the game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout opening 61 and an effect button 62. The payout opening 61 is for lending game balls or paying out (prize balls). The payout opening 61 discharges the game ball when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The effect button 62 is a so-called “CHANCE button”, “push button”, or the like. The effect button 62 is operated by the player.

The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout opening 63. The payout opening 63 is for renting out game balls or for paying out (prize balls) like the payout opening 63 of the upper plate 26. The payout opening 63 discharges the game ball when the game ball overflows from the upper plate 26.

The launching device 15 is for launching the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 to the game area 20. The launching device 15 is disposed on the lower right front side of the base door 12 and on the lower right side of the dish unit 14. The firing device 15 includes a panel body 31, a drive device (not shown), and a firing handle 32.

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the front surface side of the panel body 31. The drive unit is arranged on the back side of the panel body 31 and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid. Thus, when the player operates the firing handle 32 in the firing device 15, the game ball is fired by the operation of the drive device in response to the operation.

The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of the hit determination and various images related to the game. The various images include, for example, an identification pattern for decoration (decorative pattern), an effect image during a big hit, a demonstration effect image, the number of times the variable display of the identification pattern is suspended, and the like. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is arranged substantially at the center of the game board 17 (on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42 described later).

The game board 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front side surface of the game board 17, a game area 20 in which a shot game ball can be rolled down is formed. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 17 includes a guide rail 41, a stage 42, a game ball distribution device 5400 (first starting port 5442), a normal electric auditors product unit 400 (a second starting port 440 and a normal electric auditors product). 460), the passage gate 49, the attacker unit 500 (the special winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600), the general winning openings 53.54.450, the out opening 55, the LED unit 70, the decorative member 56, and the movable winning accessory unit 57. To have.

The guide rail 41 is configured by two rail-shaped members (hereinafter, referred to as “outer rail 41a” and “inner rail 41b”). The outer rail 41a mainly partitions (defines) the game area 20. The outer rail 41a is arranged so as to surround the game area 20. The inner rail 41b is for guiding the shot game ball to the upper part of the game area 20 together with the outer rail 41a. The inner rail 41b is arranged inside the outer rail 41a on the left side of the game board 17.

The stage 42 divides the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 20 into right and left of the stage 42. The stage 42 is arranged above the game area 20. The stage 42 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front. On the inner side (inner peripheral side) of the stage 42, the game board 17 is opened and a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is formed.

The game ball launched by the launching device 15 collides with the stage 42, the game nail 68, and the like driven into the game board 17, and flows downward toward the lower side of the game board 17 while changing the traveling direction. The flow-down area of the game ball that has been launched is sorted according to the amount of operation of the launch handle 32. Specifically, when the operation amount of the firing handle 32 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side of the stage 42. On the other hand, when the operation amount of the firing handle 32 is large, the launched game ball flows down on the right side of the stage 42. The hitting method of letting the game ball flow down to the left side of the stage 42 is called so-called "left hitting", and the hitting method of letting the game ball flow down to the right side of the stage 42 is called so-called "right hitting".

The game ball distribution device 5400 is a device that appropriately distributes the game balls to the first starting port 5442 or the out ports 5443 and 5444. The game ball distribution device 5400 is arranged in the lower center of the game area 20.

The first starting opening 5442 gives a trigger for a hit determination on the condition of winning (passing) a game ball, and the result of the hit determination is the liquid crystal display device 16, a first special symbol display portion 73 and a second special symbol which will be described later. This gives an opportunity to display on the display unit 74. A first starting port switch 5472 is arranged at the first starting port 5442 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472. When a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 5472, a hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (board unit 19 shown in FIG. 2), and a preset number of game balls are paid out 61. Alternatively, it is dispensed (discharged) from the dispensing port 63 to the upper plate 26 or the lower plate 27. In addition, the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 5442 is performed by left-handed hitting.
A detailed description of the configuration of the game ball distribution device 5400 will be described later.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440 and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged in the lower right portion of the game area 20.

The second starting opening 440 gives a trigger for a hit determination on the condition of winning (passing) a game ball, and the result of the hit determination is the liquid crystal display device 16, a first special symbol display portion 73 and a second special symbol which will be described later. This gives an opportunity to display on the display unit 74. A second starting port switch 441 is provided at the second starting port 440 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 441, a hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the board unit 19 shown in FIG. 2), and a preset number of game balls are paid out 61. Alternatively, it is dispensed (discharged) from the dispensing port 63 to the upper plate 26 or the lower plate 27. The difficulty of winning a prize in the second starting opening 440 is determined by the ordinary electric accessory 460. In addition, the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 is performed by right-handed striking.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a blade member 461 that is rotatable in the left-right direction and a starting opening solenoid 462 (see FIG. 5) that drives the blade member 461. The ordinary electric accessory 460 is arranged above the second starting port 440. The normal electric accessory 460 can be moved (driven) between an open state in which the game ball can easily pass and a closed state in which the game ball can hardly pass by driving the blade member 461 by the starting opening solenoid 462. Is composed of. When the game ball passes through the blade member 461 in the ordinary electric accessory 460, the game ball is won in the second starting opening 440. The opening/closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (the blade member 461) is performed for a predetermined period and number of times when the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol display portion 71 has a specific stop display mode.

The passage gate 49 gives a trigger for the normal symbol determination on the condition of winning (passing) the game ball. The passage gate 49 is arranged in the central right part of the game board 17 and above the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. The passage gate 49 is provided with a passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 5). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a. When the game ball is detected in the passage gate switch 49a, the normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the board unit 19 shown in FIG. 2). The game ball passes through the passage gate 49 by right-handing.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the special winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is disposed in the lower right part of the game area 20 and below the ordinary electric accessory unit 400.

The special winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in a winning game state (a big hit game state or a small hit game state) which is a game state that is advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is arranged at the special winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins the special winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout opening 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a special winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 5) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric auditors product 600 is arranged above the special winning opening 540. In the special electric auditors product 600, the shutter 610 is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 620 so that the game ball can be (or easily) opened in the special winning opening 540, and the special winning opening 540 is opened. It is configured to be able to move (drive) to a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible (or difficult). The opening drive by the special electric auditors product 600 (shutter 610), the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74, the winning gaming state (big hit gaming state or It is performed when the game is shifted to a small hit game state.

The general winning openings 53 and 54 are arranged in the lower left part of the game board 17 in a state of being separated from each other. Further, the general winning opening 450 is provided in the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. The general winning opening 53, 54, 450 are provided with general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 451 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins the general winning opening 53, 54, 450, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 451. When the game balls are detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 451, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout opening 63 to the lower plate 27) (discharging). Be done).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls of the first starting opening 5442 and the second starting opening 440 is 3, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 53.54.450 is 10, and the prize ball of the major winning opening 540. The number is set to 15 each. This value (the number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The out port 55 is arranged at the bottom of the center of the game board 17. The out port 55 is finally flown in when the launched game ball does not enter the winning (starting) ports such as the first starting port 5442.

The LED unit 70 is disposed on the lower right side of the game board 17 and outside the guide rail 41. The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70, as the various display units, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol holding display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, the first special It is provided with a hold display unit for symbols 75 and a hold display unit for second special symbols 76.

The normal symbol display unit 71 displays the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the normal electric auditors product 460 to be in the open state depending on the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination). The normal symbol display portion 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. The display LEDs 71a and 71b start variable display in which lighting and extinction are alternately repeated when a predetermined fluctuation display start condition is satisfied. The combination (display pattern) by turning on and off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is normally displayed as a symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination) is a hit, a combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 71a and 71b (special symbol) is a specific stop display mode. Thus, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is opened, and the normal electric accessory 460 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting opening The difficulty of winning a game ball in 440 is changed.

The normal symbol hold display section 72 is for displaying the number of executions of the variable display of the held normal symbols (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of times of holding the variable display of the normal symbol"). The normal symbol hold display section 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol holding display section 72 displays the number of times of holding the variable display of the normal symbol by a combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended twice, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned on. When the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 display the result of the determination (hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the game state is determined by the result of the determination (hit determination).

The first special symbol display portion 73 includes a display LED group 73a including eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs variable display upon the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 5442 (starting winning), and also displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts variable display in which eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on/off eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a lapse of a predetermined period after starting variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 5442 is a hit, the combination (special symbol) of turning on/off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and a game state in which a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display portion 73 based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 5442 is referred to as a first special symbol.

The second special symbol display portion 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a performs variable display upon the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 (starting winning), and also displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts a variable display in which eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on/off eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs stop display after a lapse of a predetermined period after starting variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 is a hit, the combination (special symbol) of turning on/off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and a game state in which a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display portion 74 based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

In this way, in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is normal. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the hit gaming state, which is a state advantageous to the player, is determined. In addition, in the present embodiment, the hit determination includes a big hit determination and a small hit determination. That is, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the game state is shifted to the big hit game state as a hit game state. Further, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the game state is shifted to the small hit game state as the hit game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, two types of hit game states are provided as the game states to be shifted from the normal game state.

The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76, the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol that has been held (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of times to hold the variable display of the special symbol") It is something to display. The first special symbol reserved display portion 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The 1st special symbol hold display section 75 and the 2nd special symbol hold display section 76 display the number of times of holding the variable display of the special symbol by turning on/off the display LEDs 75a and 75b and 76a and 76b. The display mode of turning on/off the display LEDs 75a/75b and 76a/76b is the same as the display LEDs 72a/72b of the normal symbol holding display section 72.

The decoration member 56 is a member that decorates the game board 17. The decorative member 56 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42, which is the upper part of the game board 17. The decorative member 56 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape whose longitudinal direction is the left-right direction. On the surface side (player side) of the decoration member 56, decoration imitating a logo (character), a character, a symbol, or the like is applied. The decoration member 56 is configured to emit light by an LED (not shown) or the like.

The movable accessory unit 57 is a unit body in which a movable accessory, a drive source, and the like described later are integrated. The movable accessory unit 57 can perform a predetermined effect operation using the movable accessory to enhance the interest of the player. In the present embodiment, the movable accessory unit 57 includes a first movable accessory unit (production device 2400), a second movable accessory unit 82, and a third movable accessory unit 83.

The first movable accessory unit (production device 2400) is arranged in the upper right part of the game board 17 and on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42.
A detailed description of the configuration of the first movable accessory unit (production device 2400) will be given later.

The second movable accessory unit 82 is disposed above the game board 17 and behind the decorative member 56.
A detailed description of the configuration of the second movable accessory unit 82 will be given later.

The third movable accessory units 83 are arranged on the right side and the left side of the game board 17, respectively, behind the stage 42. The third movable accessory unit 83 includes a hand accessory 86 (third movable accessory) imitating a human hand. The hand accessory 86 is configured to be movable. Further, the hand accessory 86 is configured to be capable of lighting. Most of the hand accessory 86 is hidden behind the game board 17 and the stage 42 in the standby state (state in which the effect operation is not performed) as shown in FIG. 3, and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. Further, most of the hand accessory 86 is exposed to the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the operating state (state in which an effect is being performed), which makes it easy for the player to visually recognize.

Hereinafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, an outline of the internal processing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 5442 or the second starting opening 440 will be described.

When the game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, and the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 is started. In addition, when the game ball is won in the first starting port 5442 during the variable display of the first special symbol, the game to the first starting port 5442 until the first special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed. The execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the ball is suspended. After that, when the first special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the held first special symbol is started.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display portion 74 is started. In addition, when the game ball is won in the second starting port 440 during the variable display of the second special symbol, the game to the second starting port 440 until the second special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed. The execution (start) of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the ball is suspended. After that, when the second special symbol that is being variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been held is started.

In the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not change at the same time. That is, while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed on one display portion of the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed on the other display portion. .. In the present embodiment, when the execution of the variable display of the first and second special symbols is suspended, the start winning to the second starting opening 440 is prioritized and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed.

In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of times the variable display of the first and second special symbols is held. In the present embodiment, the number of times the variable display of the first and second special symbols is held is set to 4 as an upper limit. Therefore, the maximum number of times the variable display of the special symbol is held is eight times, which is the total number of times of holding the variable display of the special symbol due to winning in the first starting opening 5442 and the second starting opening 440.

Further, during the change of the first or second special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, except for a specific case, the identification symbol made of numbers is changed in the liquid crystal display device 16. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, symbols from "1" to "8" are used as the numbers. Further, the identification symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 are stopped and displayed while the first or second special symbols that are being variably displayed in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 are stopped and displayed. Is displayed. The identification pattern is also used as identification information for production.

In addition, when the first or second special symbol stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 is in a specific stop display mode, the player is informed that it is a hit. The effect image to be displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of types of hits are provided. Further, the specific stop display mode when the first or second special symbol is stop displayed is set corresponding to the type of winning. In such a configuration, the combination of the identification symbols that are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. It becomes a mode. As a result, the player can recognize the type of hit in addition to the hit. It should be noted that some of the types of hits have a specific display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize, depending on the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. According to this, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the hit and the kind of the hit.

[Electrical structure of gaming machine]
The control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control circuit 100 for controlling a game and a sub-control circuit 200 for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (readable/writable memory), and the like.

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, etc. are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various kinds of processing according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. Although the main RAM 103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 101 in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which the information of the special symbol game is stored as start memory. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, the first special symbol starting storage area (0) in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as the starting memory, and the upper limit of the first four times The first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as the starting memory, is provided. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, the second special symbol starting storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored as the starting memory, and the second special for the upper limit of four times. A second special symbol starting storage area (1) to a second special symbol starting storage area (4), in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as a starting memory, is provided.

The main control circuit 100 also includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I/O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I/O port 105 sends input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and sends output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by, for example, quickly supplying power to the main RAM 103 when power is cut off.

Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

For example, in the main control circuit 100, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, a first special symbol hold display unit 75, The second special symbol hold display portion 76, the starting opening solenoid 462 that drives the blade member 461 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, the special winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610, etc. are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. Further, the main control circuit 100 is used for transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of hits, and the like, and a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 320 is connected.

Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected with a first starting opening switch 5472, a second starting opening switch 441, a passage gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 451 and the like. When a game ball is detected by these members, the main control circuit 100 is supplied with a predetermined detection signal from the members. Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected with a backup clear switch 330 and the like for clearing backup data at the time of power failure according to an operation of a game hall manager.

A payout/launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. To the payout/launch control circuit 300, a payout device 340 for paying out game balls, a launching device 350 for launching game balls, a card unit 360, etc. are connected. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal according to a player's operation on the ball lending operation panel 370 is supplied.

When the payout/launch control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 or the loan ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, it sends a predetermined signal to the payout device 340, The payout device 340 is controlled to pay out the game balls. Further, the payout/launch control circuit 300 supplies electric power to the firing solenoid in accordance with the rotation angle (rotation amount) when the firing handle 32 is gripped by the player and is rotated clockwise. Supply and control to launch a game ball.

Further, the command output port 106 is connected to the sub control circuit 200. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 16, control of sound generated from the speaker 24, control of light of the lamp 25, and the like in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 100 supplies a command to the sub control circuit 200 while the sub control circuit 200 does not supply a signal to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that a signal can be transmitted from the control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100.

The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 204, a voice control circuit 205, a lamp control circuit 206, and a accessory control circuit 207. The sub control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100. Further, the sub control circuit 200 is connected to an effect button switch 310 that is turned on/off by operating the effect button 62.

The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various kinds of processing according to a program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

The program ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as storage means for storing programs, tables, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this, and a storage medium readable by a computer having control means. If it is, another mode may be adopted. For example, a hard disk device, a storage medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge may be used as the storage means. Further, the programs, tables and the like are not necessarily pre-recorded, but may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Furthermore, the programs and tables may be recorded in different storage media.

The work RAM 203 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. Although the work RAM 203 is used as the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201 in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for buffering the image data, and an image signal for the image data. It is equipped with a D/A converter, etc.

The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer according to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data relating to the game, such as identification symbol image data indicating an identification symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the display control circuit 204 can control the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image relating to the game.

The voice control circuit 205 is a circuit for performing control regarding a voice generated from the speaker 24. The voice control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier (hereinafter, referred to as AMP) for amplifying a voice signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and causes the speaker 24 to generate audio.

The lamp control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the lamp 25 including a decorative lamp and the like. The lamp control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 207 controls the movable accessory unit 57 (the first movable accessory unit (production device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, and the third movable accessory unit 83). Circuit. The accessory control circuit 207 stores a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to the movable accessory unit 57, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and an operation pattern and a lighting pattern. It has a data ROM and the like.

In addition, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM according to the accessory operation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of the movable accessory unit 57. In addition, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the lighting operation of the movable accessory unit 57 is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

[basic specifications]
Hereinafter, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 6 is a table showing basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, FIG. 6A is a table showing specifications of the special symbol game. Further, FIG. 6B is a table showing specifications of the normal symbol game. Further, FIG. 6C is a table showing distribution of winning. Further, FIG. 6D is a table showing types of hits. The data in the tables shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D are stored in the main ROM 102 as a table.

In the special symbol game, the big hit determination is performed in a low probability state or a high probability state. In this way, in the special symbol game, the gaming state in which the jackpot determination is performed in the low-probability state is simply referred to as the low-probability state (or the normal state or the uncertain variation state). In addition, in the special symbol game, the gaming state in which the jackpot determination is performed in a high probability state is simply referred to as a high probability state (or a probability variation state). In this way, when the game state changes to the probability change state, a more advantageous state than the normal state is given to the player.

In addition, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is performed in a high probability state. In addition, when the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit, the opening of the normal electric accessory 460 (normal hit game) is performed for a relatively long time. Thus, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is performed in a high probability state, and the gaming state in which the normal electric auditors product 460 is opened for a relatively long time is referred to as an electric support state. In the electric support state, the time per ordinary symbol determination is shorter than the time in the non-electric support state. In this way, a state in which the power is in the power support state and the time for each normal symbol determination is short is called a time saving state. The high-probability state of the normal symbol determination is configured to be transferable when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit. In addition, the high probability state of the normal symbol determination ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, such as when the time saving state ends.

In the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is not performed in the gaming state other than the time saving state. In this way, the game state in which the normal symbol determination is not performed (game state other than the time saving state) is called the normal state (or non-time saving state). Thus, when the game state becomes the time saving state, the player is given a more advantageous state than the non-time saving state. Note that the time saving state is continued after the transition from the normal state, for example, until the hit determination (the big hit determination and the small hit determination) in the special symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times.

Note that, as described above, the normal state is a gaming state in which the jackpot determination is performed in the low-probability state in the special symbol game, and the normal symbol determination is not performed in the ordinary symbol game.

First, the specifications of the special symbol game will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 6A, in the special symbol game, the probability that the jackpot determination result in the low probability state (normal state) is a jackpot (hereinafter, referred to as jackpot probability) is the first starting opening 5442 and the second. Regardless of which of the starting prizes is given to the starting opening 440, it is commonly set to 1/200 (one coefficient for 200 random number values). In addition, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (probability variation state) is 1/100 (for 200 random number values in common, regardless of whether the first starting opening 5442 or the second starting opening 440 is a winning prize. 2 coefficients). Further, the probability that the result of the small hit determination is a hit due to the start winning of the second starting opening 440 (hereinafter referred to as the small hit probability) is 1/4 (50 coefficients for 200 random number values). Is set. It should be noted that the small hit determination based on the starting winning of the first starting opening 5442 is not performed. In other words, the probability that the small hit game is started based on the game ball winning in the second starting opening 440 is small, and the small hit game is started based on the winning game ball in the first starting opening 5442. It is set higher than the probability that

In addition, the number of STs is set to 100 times in common regardless of whether the first winning opening 5442 or the second starting opening 440 is a big hit due to a winning prize. It should be noted that ST (special time) is a probability variation state that ends according to the number of times (multi-time cutting type). In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the “time” indicates the number of hit determinations (large hit determination and small hit determination) after the transition to the probability variation state.

Note that the ST number is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 when a super-probably changed state described later is entered. Specifically, when the super-probability variation state is reached, 0 is displayed as an initial value. Then, each time the hit determination (judgment result is lost) is repeated once, a state in which the numerical value is incremented by 1 is displayed. Then, when the numerical value of the ST number reaches 100, the super-probability variation state ends. The initial value may be 100 instead of 0. In this way, when the initial value of the ST number is 100, the numerical value is decremented by 1 each time the hit determination is repeated once.

Further, the number of prize balls for winning the first starting opening 5442 is 3, the number of prize balls for winning the second starting opening 440 is 1, and the number of winning balls for winning the general winning opening 53.54.450 is The number of prize balls for winning 10 prizes and the special winning opening 540 is set to 15, respectively. Further, the maximum winning count number per opening of the special winning opening 540 in the big hit game is set to 10 counts. Further, the maximum winning count number per opening of the ordinary electric auditors product 460 in the ordinary symbol game is set to 10 counts. In addition, the number of big hit symbols is commonly set to 100 regardless of whether the first winning opening 5442 or the second starting opening 440 is a winning prize. In addition, the number of small hit symbols in the case of a start winning of the second start opening 440 is set to 100.

Next, the specifications of the normal symbol game will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 6B, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is not performed in the low probability state. Moreover, the probability that the result of the normal symbol determination in the high probability state is a win is set to 100/100. If the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit, the second starting port 440 (normal electric accessory 460) is opened three times for a relatively long time of 1.5 seconds.

Next, the distribution of the big hit and the small hit will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 6C, the big hits due to the start winning of the first start opening 5442 are divided into six kinds of big hit contents (big hit types). Specifically, the jackpot due to the start winning of the first starting opening 5442 is divided into 15R probability variation, substantial 10R probability variation, substantial 5R probability variation, 15R normal, substantial 10R normal, and substantial 5R normal. The contents of these jackpots are set so as to correspond to the special figure (1) jackpot -1 to 6 as a jackpot due to the start winning of the first starting port 5442, respectively.

Specifically, 15R probability variation is set corresponding to special figure (1) big hit -1. In addition, a substantial variation of 10R is set corresponding to special figure (1) big hit -2. In addition, the actual 5R probability variation is set corresponding to special figure (1) big hit -3. Also, 15R normal is set corresponding to special figure (1) big hit -4. In addition, substantially 10R normal is set in correspondence with special figure (1) big hit -5. In addition, substantially 5R normal is set in correspondence with special figure (1) big hit -6.

In addition, the big hit by the start winning of the second start opening 440 is divided into six kinds of big hit contents (big hit type). Specifically, the jackpot due to the starting winning of the second starting opening 440 is divided into 15R probability variation, substantial ball yield probability variation, special probability variation, 15R normal, substantial ball yield small normal, and special regular. The contents of these big hits are set so as to correspond to the special figure (2) big hits -1 to 6 as a big hit due to the start winning of the second starting opening 440, respectively.

Specifically, 15R probability variation is set corresponding to special figure (2) big hit -1. In addition, the actual odds of slight ball output are set corresponding to special figure (2) big hit -2. In addition, special probability variation is set in correspondence with special figure (2) big hit -3. Also, 15R normal is set corresponding to special figure (2) big hit -4. In addition, in accordance with the special figure (2) big hit -5, the actual small number of coins is usually set. Further, a special normal is set in correspondence with the special figure (2) big hit -6.

Further, the small hits are divided into two types of small hit contents (small hit types). Specifically, the small hits are divided into two times open (1) and two times open (2). The contents of these small hits are set so as to correspond to special figure (2) small hits -1 and 2 as small hits, respectively. Specifically, two times opening (1) is set corresponding to special figure (2) small hit -1. In addition, the special opening (2) small hit-2 is set to open twice (2).

Here, the “number” column (notation) shown in the table of FIG. 6C indicates the number of big hit symbols or the number of small hit symbols corresponding to each hit content. That is, as described above, the number of jackpots due to the starting winning prize of the first starting opening 5442 is 100, and therefore, the special figure (1) jackpot -1 to 6 is a big winning due to the starting winning prize of the first starting opening 5442, The probabilities (expected values) to be assigned are set to be 25%, 15%, 10%, 25%, 15%, 10%. Similarly, the special figures (2) jackpots -1 to 6 have a probability (expected value) of 25%, 15%, 10%, respectively, when they are jackpots due to the winning a prize of the second starting opening 440. It is set to be 25%, 15%, 10%. Similarly, the special figures (2) small hits -1 and 2 are set so that the probability (expected value) of being distributed is 98% and 2%, respectively, in the case of small hits.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6C, the special figure (1) big hit -1 to 6, the special figure (2) big hit -1 to 6, and the special figure (2) small hit -1 and 2, The number of time saved is set after each winning game (big hit game or small hit game) is finished. The number of time saved and given after the end of the winning game is set to be different depending on the states of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game when the big hit determination or the small hit determination is performed.

Here, the notation of "HH" shown in the table of FIG. 6(c) indicates that the special symbol game is in the probability changing state and the normal symbol game is in the time saving state. In addition, the notation “HL” indicates that the special symbol game is in the probable state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state. In addition, the notation “LH” indicates that the special symbol game is in a non-probable state and the normal symbol game is in a time saving state. Further, the notation “LL” indicates that the special symbol game is in the non-probable state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state. Further, the expression "between high probabilities" indicates that during the high probability state in the special symbol game, that is, a maximum of 100 times of saving and saving is given.

In such a setting, for example, in the case where the special symbol game is in the non-probable variation state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state (in the case of "LL"), the special symbol (1) jackpot -1 or 6 is a jackpot , 50 times reduction is given. On the other hand, similarly, for example, in the case of "LL", when the special figure (1) big hit -2 to 5 big hits, the number of times to save time is not given. That is, in the case where the special symbol game is in the non-probable state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state, in the case of a big hit due to the start winning of the first starting opening 5442, 35% (special figure (1) big hit- With the probability of 25% in the case of 1 + the special figure (1) big hit-10% in the case of -6), the number of times of shortening is given 50 times, and the number of times of shortening is not given with the probability of the remaining 65%.

Also, in the case of a small hit, after the small hit game is finished, in principle, the game state before the small hit is not changed and is maintained as it is. Specifically, when a small hit occurs during the ST, the ST is restarted after the small hit game is finished so as to continue counting from the number of STs related to the hit determination that has become the small hit. For example, during the ST, if the 60th small hit is a small hit, the ST is restarted so as to count from the 61st time after the small hit game ends. In this case, the remaining number of STs after the small hit game is 40. Similarly, when a small hit occurs during the time saving state, after the small hit game is over, the time saving state is restarted so as to continue counting from the number of times of the hit determination which is the small hit.

In addition, as an exception to the above-mentioned principle, for example, during ST, when the small hit occurs at the 100th time (which is the last time of ST), the ST ends after the small hit game ends (the state before the small hit occurs. Is not maintained). Similarly, for example, when a small hit occurs at the 100th time during the 100-time saving state, the short-time state ends after the small hit game ends (the state before the small hit is not maintained).

In the following, the details of the hits (the details of the big hits and the details of the small hits) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot contents (types of jackpots) are 15R probability variation, 15R normal, substantial 10R probability variation, substantial 10R normal, substantial 5R probability variation, substantial 5R normal, special probability variation, special normal, substantial payout. It is provided with a small probability variation, or a small number of balls actually played. Further, as small hit contents (type of small hit), two times opening (1) and (2) are provided.

15R probability variation and 15R normal, when the big hit game is started, in all the rounds of all 15 rounds, the number of seconds for opening the special winning opening 540 per round is 27.996 seconds. is there. As described above, in the 15R probability variation and the 15R normal, when the big hit game is started, the upper limit number of game balls can be set in the special winning opening 540 in all rounds.

Substantial 10R Probability Change and Substantial 10R Normal means that when the big hit game is started, the number of open seconds of the special winning opening 540 per round is 27.996 seconds in the 1st to 10th rounds. This is a big hit in which the number of open seconds of the special winning opening 540 per round is set to 0.102 seconds in the 11th to 15th rounds. As described above, in the actual 10R probability variation and the actual 10R normal, when the big hit game is started, the game balls are set to be able to win the special winning opening 540 in the 1st to 10th rounds, and in the 11th to 15th rounds. The game ball is set so that it is difficult (substantially impossible) to win the game at the special winning opening 540.

Substantial 5R Probability Change and Substantial 5R Normal means that when the big hit game is started, the number of seconds for opening the special winning opening 540 per round is 27.996 seconds in the first to fifth rounds. It is a big hit that is set and the number of open seconds of the special winning opening 540 per round in the 6th to 15th rounds is set to 0.102 seconds. In this way, in the real 5R probability variation and the real 5R normal, when the big hit game is started, the game balls are set to be able to win the special winning opening 540 in the first to fifth rounds, and in the sixth to 15th rounds. The game ball is set so that it is difficult (substantially impossible) to win the game at the special winning opening 540.

The special probability variation and special normal are set such that, when the big hit game is started, the special winning opening 540 is opened three times in the first first round out of all 15 rounds, and the first round concerned. The opening seconds of the special winning opening 540 are set to 0.896 seconds in the first and second opening, and the opening seconds of the special winning opening 540 are set to 26.466 seconds in the remaining third opening. From the 15th round to the 15th round, the opening seconds of the special winning opening 540 per round are set to 27.966 seconds. As described above, in the special probability variation and the special normal, when the big hit game is started, it is difficult to win the game ball into the special winning opening 540 at the opening of the first and second rounds in the first round (for example, 1 time per opening). It is set such that the maximum number of game balls can be won in the special winning opening 540 in the remaining third opening and the second to fifteenth rounds. In the special probability variation and the special normal, the opening interval between the second opening and the third opening in the first first round is set to 5.0 seconds.

When the big hit game starts, the number of seconds that the big winning opening 540 is open per round is 0 when the big hit game is started. This is a big hit in which the opening seconds of the special winning opening 540 per round in the third to fifteenth rounds are set to 0.102 seconds in the third to fifteenth rounds. In this way, in the actual odds of small payout and the small actual payout, when the big hit game is started, it is difficult to win the game ball into the special winning opening 540 in all rounds (more specifically, in the first and second rounds). Is set so that, for example, one game ball is won for each opening, and the game ball cannot be won after the third round). In addition, in the probability of a small actual payout and the normal of a small actual payout, the inter-round interval between the second round and the third round is set to 5.0 seconds.

The two times opening (1) and (2) are small hits for opening the special winning opening 540 twice for each 0.896 seconds when the small hit game is started. That is, the small hit game is to operate the special winning opening 540 in a predetermined opening/closing manner. Thus, in the two opening (1) and (2), even if the small hit game is started, the game is started. It is set so that it is difficult to win a ball at the special winning opening 540 (for example, about one win per opening). In the second opening (1), the small hit end interval after the second opening of the special winning opening 540 is set to 1.0 second. In the second opening (2), the small hit end interval after the second opening of the special winning opening 540 is set to 5.0 seconds.

In this way, when the type of big hit is special probability variation and special normal, the number of seconds for opening the special winning opening 540 in the opening of the first and second rounds of the first round, and the case of small hit (double opening (1) And (2)), the opening seconds of the special winning opening 540 in the first and second opening are set to the same 0.896 seconds. That is, the special probability variation and the special normal and the small hit (two times opening (1) and (2)) are the same in the opening mode of the special winning opening 540 until the second opening of the special winning opening 540 is completed. Is set. In this way, the special probability variation and the special normal big hit game open and close the special winning opening 540 in a predetermined opening and closing manner (pseudo small hit opening and closing manner) that makes it look like a small hit game at the opening of the first and second rounds. It is what makes them.

It should be noted that, in the small hit (two times opening (1) and (2)), the hit end intervals after the second opening of the special winning opening 540 is set to be different from each other. Specifically, in the second opening (1), the hit end interval after the second opening of the special winning opening 540 is set to 1.0 second. Further, in the second opening (2), the hit end interval after the second opening of the special winning opening 540 is set to 5.0 seconds.

In addition, the interval between the opening of the second opening and the opening of the third opening in the special probability variation and the special normal, and the small hit end interval in the second opening (2) of the small hits have the same number of seconds. (5.0 seconds). That is, the special probability variation and special normal, and the small win twice opening (2), the opening mode of the special winning opening 540 is set to be the same until the third opening of the special winning opening 540 is started. In other words, the special probability variation and the special normal big hit game are found to be big hit games after the third opening of the first round is performed. In this way, the special probability variation and the special normal big hit game are operated in the pseudo small hit opening/closing manner, and then the big winning opening 540 is opened/closed in a specific opening/closing manner (opening/closing manner after the big hit) It is what makes them.

Similarly, the number of seconds that the special winning opening 540 is opened in the opening of the first and second rounds when the type of big hit is a small variation in actual payout and a small amount of real payout, and a small hit (open twice) The open seconds of the special winning opening 540 in the first and second opening (in the case of (1) and (2)) are set to the same 0.896 seconds. That is, the actual odds of small payout and the normal small actual payout, and the small hit (twice open (1) and (2)) mean that the big win 540 is won until the second win of the big win 540 is completed. The same opening mode is set.

In addition, the interval between rounds between the opening of the second round and the opening of the third round in the case where the odds of actual payouts are small and the normals of the actual payouts are small, and the small win end interval in the second open of small wins (2). And are set to the same number of seconds (5.0 seconds). That is, the probability of a small amount of real payout, the normal of a small amount of real payout, and the second opening of the small hit (2) mean that the special winning opening 540 is opened until the third opening of the special winning opening 540 is started. It is set to the same. In this way, the regular big winning game with a small variation in actual payout and a small actual payout amount is a big winning opening 540 in a predetermined opening/closing mode (pseudo small hit opening/closing mode) that makes it look like a small hit game in the opening of the first and second rounds. To open and close.

[Game flow]
Below, the flow of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game progresses while repeating the transition to an appropriate gaming state at a predetermined timing. Here, corresponding production modes are set to the game states. Various effect contents are set in the effect mode. That is, when the game is started, the game mode is shifted to an appropriate game state, and the effect in the effect mode corresponding to the shifted game state is performed. In the present embodiment, mainly effect modes 1 to 6 are provided as effect modes.

As shown in FIG. 7, at the start of the game, in most cases, the game state is the normal game state (non-probability variation state/non-time saving (non-electric power saving) state). In the normal gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed as the effect mode (step S900). The transition from the normal game state to another game state is mainly triggered by the result of the hit determination by the start winning of the first start opening 5442. Exceptionally, for example, when there is a suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol when the electric support state of 100 times ends, the hit determination of the second special symbol in the normal game state is the maximum number of suspension times. It is performed up to four times, and if it becomes a big hit according to the determination result, the electric support state is entered, but since it is a rare case, it is omitted from this drawing. It should be noted that the above four times is a state in which it is possible to return to the electric support state if a big hit at that time despite the fact that the electric support state has ended, so it is a normal game state and the second special symbol While performing the hit determination, the player may have an expectation as a special effect mode different from the effect mode 1.

In the normal gaming state, the big hit determination is performed by a so-called left-handed starting start prize of the first starting opening 5442. In addition, when the result of the big hit determination by the start winning of the first start opening 5442 is a big hit and the game state shifts to the time saving (electric support) state, so-called right hitting is performed. In this way, the jackpot determination is performed by the start winning of the second start opening 440 while the time saving (electric support) state continues. It should be noted that, although the result of the big hit determination by the start winning of the first starting opening 5442 is a big hit, when the game state does not shift to the time saving (electric power saving) state (the game state is the non-time saving (non-electric power saving) state) If left unchanged), left-handed strokes will continue.

When the game state shown in step S900 is an uncertain change state/non-time saving (non-electric power saving) state, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit judgment (hit judgment) is a special figure (1) big hit. When it becomes -1, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the probability variation state/time saving (electric support) state. Further, with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 1 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 2 is started (steps S901, S902). In the game state in which the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the number of STs is set to 100 and the number of time saving is set to 50.

Further, when the game state shown in step S902 is the probable variation state/time saving (electric support) state, and the production of the production mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) big hit- When any of 1 to 3, the game state shifts to the probability variation state/time saving (electric power saving) state (steps S910 and S911). That is, the game state after the transition becomes the same as the game state before the transition. In addition, with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 2 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 3 is started. In the game state in which the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the number of STs is set to 100 times, and the number of time saving is set to continue during the probability change state (maximum 100 times).

In addition, when the game state shown in step S911 is the probability change state/time saving (electric power saving) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit judgment (hit judgment) is a special figure (2) big hit- When any of 1 to 3, the game state shifts to the probability variation state/time saving (electric support) state again (steps S912 and S911). In addition, with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued. In addition, with the transition of the game state, the number of STs and the number of time reductions counted until the big hit are cleared. That is, the number of STs and the number of shortening times are counted from 0.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S911 is the probability change state/time saving (electric power saving) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit judgment (hit judgment) is a special figure (2) big hit- When any of 4 to 6, the game state shifts to an indeterminate change state/time saving (electric power saving) state described later (steps S913 and S921). With the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 3 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 4 is started.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S911 is the probability change state/time saving (electric power saving) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (open twice. In 1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations for the hit. Specifically, when the number of times of hit determination related to the hit is a predetermined number (100 times), ST (probability change state) and the time saving state end, so the game state shifts to the normal game state. (Steps S914 and S915; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of times of hit determination related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current game state (probably changed state/time saving (electric power saving) state) is maintained and the ST number and time saving number are cleared. However, the counting is restarted (steps S914 and S915; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued.

Further, when the game state shown in step S911 is the probability change state/time saving (electric power saving) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, if the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) are lost. , The gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (100 times), ST (probability change state) and the time saving state end, so the game state shifts to the normal game state. (Steps S916, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current game state (probability change state/time saving (electric power saving) state) is maintained and the ST number and time saving number are cleared. However, the counting is restarted (steps S916 and S915; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued.

Further, when the game state shown in step S902 is the probable variation state/time saving (electric support) state, and the production of the production mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) big hit- When any of 4 to 6, the game state shifts to the indeterminate change state/time saving (electric power support) state (steps S920, S921). In addition, with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 2 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 4 is started. In addition, in the game state in which the effect of the effect mode 4 is performed, the number of time saving is set to 100 times.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S921 is an uncertain change state/time saving (electric power saving) state and the effect mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) big hit -1. When any one of 3 to 3, the game state shifts to the probability variation state/time saving (electric power saving) state (steps S922, S911). Further, with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 4 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 3 is started. With the transition of the game state, the number of saved time saved until the big hit is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S921 is an uncertain variation state/time saving (electric power saving) state and the effect mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) big hit-4. When any one of from 6 to 6, the game state again shifts to the non-probable variation state/time saving (electric power saving) state (steps S923, S921). Further, with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 4 is continued. In addition, with the transition of the game state, the number of saved time saved until the big hit is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S921 is the non-probable variation state/time saving (electric power saving) state, and the effect mode 4 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (open twice (1 ) And (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations for the hit. Specifically, when the number of times of hit determination related to the hit is a predetermined number (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state because the time saving state ends (steps S924, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of times of hit determination related to the hit is not a predetermined number (100 times), the current game state (non-probability change state/time saving (electric power saving) state) is maintained and the time saving number is not cleared. , Counting is restarted (steps S924 and S925; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S921 is an uncertain variation state/time saving (electric power saving) state and the production of the production mode 4 is performed, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) are lost. Then, the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (100 times), the time saving state ends, so the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S926, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current game state (indeterminate change state/time saving (electric power saving) state) is maintained and the time saving number is not cleared. , The counting is restarted (steps S926, S925; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 is continued.

Further, when the game state shown in step S902 is the probable variation state/time saving (electric support) state, and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (open twice. In 1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations for the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), ST (probability variation state) continues while the time saving state ends, so the probability variation state/non-time reduction ( The game state shifts to the non-electric power support state (steps S930, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 5 is started. On the other hand, when the number of times of hit determination related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current game state (probably changed state/time saving (electric power saving) state) is maintained and the ST number and time saving number are cleared. However, the counting is restarted (steps S930 and S931; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 is continued.

Further, when the game state shown in step S902 is the probability variation state/time saving (electric support) state, and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, if the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) are lost. , The gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (50 times), ST (probability variation state) continues while the time saving state ends, so the probability variation state/non-time reduction ( The game state shifts to the non-electric power support state (steps S932, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 5 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current game state (probability change state/time saving (electric power saving)) is maintained and the ST number and time saving number are cleared. Instead, the counting is restarted (steps S932, S931; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 is continued.

In this way, when the effect of the effect mode 2 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 5 is started, ST (probably changed state) is continued while the time saving (electric power support) state is ended. That is, the player will hit left instead of right. In addition, in this embodiment, the effect of the effect mode 5 is set to the same content as the effect of the effect mode 1. In this way, when the effect of the effect mode 5 is started, the player enters a game state (latent probability change state) in which it is difficult to recognize that ST (probability change state) continues. The effect in the effect mode 5 may have the same content as the effect in the effect mode 1, and may be performed by notifying the player that the latent probability variation state has been decided.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is the probability change state/non-time saving (non-electric power saving) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1). When either big hit -1 or 2, the game state transitions to the probability variation state/time saving (electric support) state (steps S934, S911). Further, with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 5 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 3 is started. With the transition of the game state, the number of STs counted until the big hit is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is the probability change state/non-time saving (non-electric power saving) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1). When it becomes the big hit -3, the gaming state shifts to the probability variation state/non-time saving (non-electric power saving) state again (steps S935 and S933). Further, with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 5 is continued. Also, with the transition of the game state, the number of STs counted until the big hit is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is the probability change state/non-time saving (non-electric power saving) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1). When either big hit -4 or 5, the gaming state shifts to the non-probable variation state/non-time saving (non-electric support) state (that is, the normal gaming state) (steps S936, S900). In addition, with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 5 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. With the transition of the game state, the number of STs counted until the big hit is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is the probability change state/non-time saving (non-electric power saving) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1). When it becomes the big hit -6, the game state shifts to the non-probability change state/time saving (electric power saving) state (steps S937, S951). Further, with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 5 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 6 is started. With the transition of the game state, the number of STs counted until the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is the probability variation state/non-time saving (non-electric power saving) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, if the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is lost, The game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number, ST (probability change state) ends, so the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S938, S939; Yes). , S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 5 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number, the current game state (probably changed state/non-time saving (non-electric power saving) state) is maintained, the ST number is not cleared, and the count is It is restarted (steps S938 and S939; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 5 is continued.

In addition, the predetermined number of times in step S939 is set according to what triggered the production in the production mode 5 currently being performed. Specifically, when the effect of the effect mode 5 currently performed is started when the number of hit determinations reaches 50 after the effect of the effect mode 2 is started (step S931; Yes). ), the predetermined number of times in step S939 is 50 (from the start of the effect in the effect mode 5). On the other hand, the effect currently performed in the effect mode 5 is the special figure (1) big hit -2 or 3 shown in step S960, or the special figure (1) big hit -3 shown in step S935. When it is started with the trigger, the predetermined number of times in step S939 is 100 (from the start of the effect in the effect mode 5).

In addition, when the game state shown in step S900 is the non-probable variation state/non-time saving (non-electric power saving) state and the production of the production mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1). ) When the jackpot becomes -6, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the indeterminate change state/time saving (electric support) state. Further, with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 1 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 6 is started (steps S950, S951). In the game state where the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the number of time saving is set to 50 times.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S951 is an uncertain variation state/time saving (electric support) state, and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the big hit judgment (hit judgment) is a special figure (2) big hit. When any one of -1 to 3 is entered, the gaming state shifts to the probability variation state/time saving (electric power saving) state (steps S952, S911). Further, with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 6 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 3 is started. With the transition of the game state, the number of saved time saved until the big hit is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S951 is an uncertain variation state/time saving (electric support) state, and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the big hit judgment (hit judgment) is a special figure (2) big hit. When any one of -4 to 6 is entered, the game state shifts to the indeterminate change state/time saving (electric power saving) state (steps S953, S921). Further, with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 6 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 4 is started. With the transition of the game state, the number of saved time saved until the big hit is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S951 is an uncertain change state/time saving (electric power saving) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice). When (1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations for the hit. Specifically, when the number of times of hit determination related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state because the time saving state ends (steps S954, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 6 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current game state (non-probability change state/time saving (electric power saving) state) is maintained and the time saving number is not cleared. , Counting is restarted (steps S954 and S955; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 6 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S951 is an uncertain change state/time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) are lost. Then, the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations relating to the loss is a predetermined number (50 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state because the time saving state ends (steps S956, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 6 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current game state (indeterminate change state/time saving (electric power saving)) is maintained, and the time saving number is not cleared, Counting is restarted (steps S956, S955; No).

In addition, when the game state shown in step S900 is the non-probable variation state/non-time saving (non-electric power saving) state and the production of the production mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1). ) When the big hit becomes -2 or 3, the game state shifts to the probability variation state/non-time saving (non-electric power saving) state (steps S960, S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 1 is finished and the effect of the effect mode 5 is started.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S900 is the non-probable variation state/non-time saving (non-electric power saving) state and the production of the production mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1). ) When it becomes a big hit -4 or 5, the game state shifts to the normal game state again. Further, with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 1 is continued (steps S970, S900).

Further, when the game state shown in step S900 is the non-probable variation state/non-time saving (non-electric power saving) state, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, if the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is lost, The normal gaming state is maintained. That is, the effect of the effect mode 1 is continued (steps S980 and S900).

In the flow of such a game, when the effect mode 2 is started (step S902), the ST state is set to 100 times by shifting the game state to the probability variation state/time saving (electric support) state. It Similarly, when the effect mode 3 is started (step S911), the number of STs is set to 100 by shifting the game state to the probability variation state/time saving (electric support) state. Thus, after the production mode 2 or 3 is started (that is, after ST is started), for example, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the current game state is maintained after the small hit game is finished (in principle). , ST number is not cleared and counting is restarted. In this way, the effect of the effect mode 2 or 3 is continued.

Here, as described above, when the small hit game is started, the special winning opening 540 is opened twice such that one game ball is won per opening. That is, when the effect mode 2 or 3 is started (when ST is started), for example, until the number of hit determination reaches a predetermined number and the effect mode is ended (until ST is ended. During), the small hit game can be repeated. In this way, when the small hit game is repeated, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by the small hit game and increase the number of game balls that the player has.

In the following, ST that can obtain a prize ball by a small hit game and increase the number of game balls at the player's hand is referred to as a super-probably changed state. In addition, a game in which a prize ball is obtained by a small hit game after the super-probability change state and the number of game balls at the player's hand is increased is called rush (RUSH). That is, the rush (per one time) is to continue from the big hit that triggered the transition to the super-probability variation state to the next big hit or the end of the time saving state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game in which the time saving state ends (for example, 100 or 50 times of the hit determination described later) becomes the rush end condition.

In addition, after the production mode 2 is started, if the production mode 3 is started by a special jackpot (2) big hit -1 to 3, a game state before and after the big hit is in a super-probable variation state. Therefore, it is assumed that the ultra-probable variation state continues. In such a case, it is assumed that the rush is continuously performed (the second rush is performed).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the super-probable variation state is reached, a payout display regarding the acquired payout is performed. The detailed description of the payout display will be described later.

[Description of operation of main control circuit]
The processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described below.

[Main processing]
First, main processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S10, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing. In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs backup restoration processing, initialization setting processing, and the like. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S11.

In step S11, the main CPU 101 performs a random value update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random number counter, the effect condition selecting random number counter, and the like. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S12.

In step S12, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates various timers such as a timer for synchronizing the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201, and a special winning opening 540 opening time timer. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S13.

In step S13, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination is a hit according to the detection signal from the first start port switch 5472 or the second start port switch 441, and stores the determination result in the main RAM 103. Perform processing to do so. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S14. The details of this process will be described later.

In step S14, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit according to the detection signal from the passage gate switch 49a, and stores the determination result in the main RAM 103. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S15.

In step S15, the main CPU 101 executes a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 101, the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 according to the determination result of the hit determination and the normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 in the process of step S13 and step S14. Then, a process of storing a control signal for driving the normal symbol display portion 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. The main CPU 101 transmits the stored control signal to the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74, and the normal symbol display portion 71. In this way, the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74 variably and stop-displays the special symbol based on the received control signal. In addition, the normal symbol display unit 71 displays the normal symbol in a variable display and a stop display based on the received control signal. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S16.

In step S16, the main CPU 101 executes game information output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs the game information to an external device (for example, the calling device or the hall computer). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 101 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for driving the special winning opening 540 (shutter 610) and the second starting opening 440 (ordinary electric accessory 460). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S18.

In step S18, the main CPU 101 executes command output processing. In this processing, the main CPU 101 sends various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S19.

In step S19, the main CPU 101 executes payout processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 wins game balls at various winning openings (specifically, large winning openings 540, first starting opening 5442, second starting opening 440, general winning openings 53.54.450). Whether or not it is determined. When the main CPU 101 determines that a game ball has won in various winning openings, it sends a payout request command corresponding to the winning to the payout/firing control circuit 300. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S11 again, and repeats the processing from step S11 to step S19.

[System timer interrupt processing]
The system timer interrupt processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described below with reference to FIG.
The system timer interrupt process is performed by interrupting the main process every predetermined period even when the main process is being performed.

In step S20, the main CPU 101 executes register saving processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 saves the running program stored in the register. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S21.

In step S21, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the big hit determination random value counter, the big hit symbol determination random value counter, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S22.

In step S22, the main CPU 101 performs switch input processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 uses various switches (specifically, the first starting port switch 5472, the second starting port switch 441, the passage gate switch 49a, the count switch 541, and the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 451. Etc.) is input or not (that is, whether or not a game ball is detected in various switches). When the main CPU 101 determines that the game ball has been detected by any of the various switches (when the game ball has won any of the various winning openings), it sends a command to the sub-control circuit 200. .. For example, the main CPU 101 transmits a special winning opening winning command to the sub control circuit 200 when the count switch 541 counts (detects) a game ball. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S23. The details of this process will be described later.

In step S23, the main CPU 101 executes register restoration processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 restores the saved program to the register. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

[Special symbol control processing]
In the following, the subroutine (special symbol control process) performed in step S13 of FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG.
Note that, in FIG. 11, the numerical values described on the sides of steps S101 to S108 indicate control state flags corresponding to these steps. Here, the control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes in steps S101 to S108 to be executed. The numerical value is stored in a storage area in the main RAM 103 that functions as a control state flag.

In step S100, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the control state flag. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S101.

In addition, in step S101 to step S108 described later, the main CPU 101 executes a step corresponding to the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103, according to the value. More specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to perform the process in each step based on the value of the control state flag, and according to the determination result, each of the steps is performed at a predetermined timing set for each step. Perform the processing in steps. As a result, the specific symbol game is progressed. The predetermined timing is determined according to a waiting time timer or the like. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine without performing the processing in each step and executes another subroutine. The main CPU 101 also performs the system timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 10 at predetermined intervals, separately from this subroutine.

In step S101, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process. Details of this processing will be described later. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S102.

In step S102, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation time management process. In this process, the main CPU 101, the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management, when the variation time has elapsed, the control state flag a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management And the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 sets to perform the process of step S103 after the waiting time after confirmation elapses. Details of this processing will be described later. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S103.

In step S103, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 101, the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management, when the waiting time after confirmation has elapsed, the result of the hit determination is a win (big hit or small hit) Or not. When the result of the hit determination is a hit, the main CPU 101 sets the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 sets to perform the process of step S104 after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the result of the hit determination is a loss. That is, the main CPU 101 sets to execute the process of step S108. Details of this processing will be described later. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S104.

In step S104, the main CPU 101 performs a hit start interval management process. In this processing, the main CPU 101 sends a signal to open the special winning opening 540 when the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management and the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. , To the special winning opening solenoid 620. As a result, the main CPU 101 controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening 540.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open to the control state flag, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 0.1 seconds or about 30 seconds) to the special winning opening opening timer. Set to. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S105. Details of this processing will be described later. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S105.

In step S105, the main CPU 101 executes a special winning opening reopening waiting time management process. In this processing, when the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval has elapsed, the main winning opening opening counter is activated. The memory is updated so as to increase by "1". The main CPU 101 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 0.1 seconds or about 30 seconds) in the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 sets to perform the process of step S106. Details of this processing will be described later. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S106.

In step S106, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening opening process. In this processing, when the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open, the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is “10” or more, and the opening upper limit time has passed ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the special winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. The main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the special winning opening 540 when either condition is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the maximum winning opening opening maximum value (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 101 sets a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval in the control state flag in the case of the final round, and sets a value (05H) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management in the case of not the final round. Set the control status flag. Details of this processing will be described later. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S107.

In step S107, the main CPU 101 executes hit end interval processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end when the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. Set the status flag. That is, the main CPU 101 sets to perform the process of step S108. Details of this processing will be described later. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S108.

In step S108, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol game ending process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check when the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, the main CPU 101 sets to perform the process of step S101. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

As described above, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to advance the special symbol game. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, and “07H” when the result of the hit determination is a loss in the case where it is not in the big hit or small hit game state. By sequentially setting, the processes of step S101, step S102, step S103, and step S108 shown in FIG. 11 are performed at a predetermined timing. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "00H", "01H", "02H", "03H" when the result of the hit determination is a big hit or a small hit when the game is not the big hit or the small hit game state. By sequentially setting, the processing of step S101, step S102, step S103, and step S104 shown in FIG. 11 is performed at a predetermined timing to control the big hit or the small hit game state. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "04H" and "05H" in this order when the big hit or the small hit game state is controlled, so that step S105 and step S106 shown in FIG. The process of is performed at a predetermined timing to perform a big hit or a small hit game. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "04H", "06H", and "07H" in order when the big hit or the small hit game ending condition is satisfied, so that the step S105 shown in FIG. The processing of steps S107 and S108 is performed at a predetermined timing to end the big hit or small hit game.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
In the following, a subroutine (special symbol storage check process) performed in step S101 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S110, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S111. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value indicating the special symbol storage check, it ends this subroutine.

In step S111, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a start memory. In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines that there is no special symbol game starting memory, that is, the first special symbol starting memory region (0) to the first special symbol starting memory region (4) or the second special symbol starting memory. If the data (random value for hit determination) from the area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4) is not stored, the process proceeds to step S112. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a starting memory (more specifically, a starting memory corresponding to at least one of the first and second special symbols), the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S112, the main CPU 101 performs demo display processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a demo display permission value in the main RAM 103. When the state in which the starting memory of the special symbol game is 0 is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the main CPU 101 sets a value that permits execution of the demo display as the demo display permission value. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, a demo display is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the starting memory corresponding to the second special symbol is 0. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the presence or absence of data in the second special symbol starting storage area (4) from the second special symbol starting storage area (0), and the starting storage corresponding to the second special symbol is 0. That is, if it is determined that the data is not stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (4) from the second special symbol starting storage area (0), the process is moved to step S115. On the other hand, in the main CPU 101, the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not 0, that is, data is stored in the second special symbol start memory region (0) to the second special symbol start memory region (4). If it is determined, the process proceeds to step S114.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (02H) indicating the fluctuation of the second special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S116.

In step S115, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01H) indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S116.

In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S117.

In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process. In this process, the main CPU 101, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, each of the data of the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), A process of shifting (storing) from the first special symbol starting storage area (0) to the first special symbol starting storage area (3) is performed. Further, the main CPU 101, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, each of the data of the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the second A process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (3) is performed. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S118.

In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the high probability flag, and selects one of the plurality of hit determination tables having different numbers of judgment values (big hit determination values) to be a big hit based on the read high probability flag. To do. That is, when the high-probability flag has a predetermined value, the high-probability hit (big-hit) determination table with a large number of big-hit determination values is referred to, and when the high-probability flag is not the predetermined value, the big-hit determination is made. A normal hit (big hit) determination table having a small value is referred to. Thus, when the high-probability flag is a predetermined value, that is, when the gaming state is the high-probability state (probability change state), the probability of shifting to the big-hit gaming state is higher than in the normal time.

Then, the main CPU 101 is a random number value for the hit determination of the special symbol starting storage area which is extracted at the time of starting winning and is set first in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) and the second special symbol starting storage area (0). And the selected hit determination table. Then, the main CPU 101 determines that it is a big hit when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match. On the other hand, when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value do not match, the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (has lost). In this way, the main CPU 101 makes a judgment (big hit judgment) in the big hit judgment processing whether or not to make a big hit game state advantageous to the player. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S119.

In step S119, the main CPU 101 performs a small hit determination process. In addition, the small hit determination process is performed when it is not a big hit in the large hit determination process in step S118. In this processing, the main CPU 101, the random number value for the hit determination of the special symbol starting storage area previously set in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) and the second special symbol starting storage area (0), and preset. It is determined whether or not the determination value of the small hit that has been made matches. Then, the main CPU 101 determines that it is a small hit when the random number for hit determination and the small hit determination value match. On the other hand, when the random number for hit determination and the small hit determination value do not match, the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a small hit (has lost). In this way, the main CPU 101, in the small hit determination process, determines whether to enter the small hit game state (small hit determination).

In the present embodiment, as the hit determination random number value stored in the first special symbol starting storage area and the hit determination table to be referred to, two types are prepared for normal use and high probability (for probability variation), As a hit determination table to be referred to the random number for hit determination stored in the second special symbol starting storage area, two types are prepared for normal use and for high probability (for probability variation), and a total of four types of hit determination A table is prepared. The two types of hit determination tables for normal use have the same big hit probability, and the two types of hit determination tables for high probability use the same big hit probability. On the other hand, the number of small hit judgment values in the hit judgment table for normal use and the hit judgment table for high probability (for probability variation), which is referred to as the hit judgment random number value stored in the first special symbol starting storage area Are the same. Further, the number of small hit determination values in the hit determination table for normal use and the hit determination table for high probability (for probability variation), which is referred to as the random number value for hit determination stored in the second special symbol starting storage area, are the same. Is. In this way, the main CPU 101 allows the player to obtain a large amount of game balls as compared to the normal game state, provided that the game balls have passed through the starting area (first starting port 5442, second starting port 440). 1 hit game state, a second hit that can obtain a small amount of game balls compared to the first hit game state Game state, a third hit that can obtain a game ball equivalent to the second hit game state It is an example of a hit determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a game state.

In addition, the small hit probability due to winning in the first starting opening 5442 of the normal game may be set larger or smaller than the small hit probability due to winning in the second starting opening 440. The jackpot probability of winning in the first starting opening 5442 of the normal game may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning in the second starting opening 440.

In this way, by the processing of steps S118 and S119, one of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss is determined as the result of the hit determination for the special symbol game. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S120.

In step S120, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a big hit symbol when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, a small hit symbol when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, and when it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, That is, in the case of losing, the losing symbol is determined. Details of this processing will be described later. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S121.

In step S121, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern for determining the special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the process of step S120 and the result of the hit determination determined in the processes of steps S118 and S119. Select a table. Then, the main CPU 101 determines (selects) a variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table. The main CPU 101 stores the selected variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines the variable display mode of the special symbol on the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74 based on the data indicating such a variation pattern.

The data indicating the variation pattern thus stored is supplied to the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74. Thereby, the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74, the special symbol is variably displayed in the determined variation pattern. The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this manner is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special figure variation pattern designation command. As a result, under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, effect display according to the received special figure variation pattern designation command is performed. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S122.

In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation time setting process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the variation time corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern in the waiting time timer. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S123.

In step S123, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 103. The special symbol effect start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. The sub-control circuit 200 starts production based on the received special symbol production start command. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S124.

In step S124, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the variable display this time. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

[Special symbol determination process]
In the following, the subroutine (special symbol determination process) performed in step S120 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S150, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the big hit determination in step S118 is a big hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S151. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S156.

In step S151, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the variation state number is (01H). When determining that the variation state number is (01H), the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S152. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation state number is not (01H), the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S154.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of determining a big hit symbol of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the big hit symbol determination random number value extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter and the hit determination table. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S153.

In step S153, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting the big hit symbol data and the big hit symbol command of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the first special symbol display section 73. The first special symbol display unit 73 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the command of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol is drawn and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the big hit stop display mode. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S162.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 executes a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol based on the big hit symbol determination random number value extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter and the hit determination table. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S155.

In step S155, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting the big hit symbol data and the big hit symbol command of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the big hit symbol data of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 74. The second special symbol display unit 74 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the command of the big special symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol is drawn and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the big hit stop display mode. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S162.

In step S156, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether or not the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. When the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S160. When determining that the result of the small hit is not a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S164.

In step S160, the main CPU 101 executes a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol, based on the random number value extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S161.

In step S161, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting the data of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol and the command of the small hit symbol. In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display section 74. The second special symbol display unit 74 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the command of the small winning symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. .. As a result, under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol is drawn and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the small hit stop display mode. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting hit start interval display time data corresponding to the winning symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol). In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets, in the main RAM 103, the hit start interval display time data corresponding to a winning symbol (a big winning symbol, a small winning symbol) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the special winning opening opening count related data. In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets the special winning opening opening count related data in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

In step S164, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the lost symbol and the command of the lost symbol. In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the lost symbols in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and the first special symbol display unit is set according to whether the special symbol that is fluctuating is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74. The first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74 variably displays the special symbol and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the lost symbol of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a command for a lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol is drawn out and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in a disengagement stop display mode. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

[Special symbol variable time management processing]
In the following, with reference to FIG. 14, a subroutine (special symbol variation time management process) performed in step S102 of FIG. 11 will be described.

In step S200, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management. When determining that the control state flag is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S201. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, it ends this subroutine.

In step S201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S202. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

In step S202, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management as a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management in the control state flag. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S203.

In step S203, the main CPU 101 executes a process of setting a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command data is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. Thereby, the sub-control circuit 200 comes to recognize the stop of the symbol. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S204.

In step S204, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer as a waiting time after confirmation. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the post-determination wait time in an area of the main RAM 103 that functions as a wait time timer. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

[Special symbol display time management process]
In the following, a subroutine (special symbol display time management process) performed in step S103 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.

In step S300, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When determining that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S301. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

In step S301, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S302. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S304.

In step S302, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the big hit determination in step S118 is a big hit. When determining that the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S303. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

In step S303, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the game state flag of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

In step S304, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the big hit determination in step S118 is a big hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S311. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot determination result is not a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S305.

In step S305, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the hour/hour counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When determining that the hour/hour counter is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S325. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the hour/hour counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S306.

In step S306, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving counter of the main RAM 103. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S307.

In step S307, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the hour/hour counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When determining that the hour/hour counter is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S308. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the hour/hour counter is not "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S325.

In step S308, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the time saving flag of the main RAM 103. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S309.

In step S309, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a time saving end command in the main RAM 103. The time saving end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 becomes aware of the time saving end. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S325.

In step S325, the main CPU 101 determines whether the ST number counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When determining that the ST number counter is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S310. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the ST number counter is not "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S326.

In step S326, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the ST number counter of the main RAM 103. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S327.

In step S327, the main CPU 101 determines whether the ST number counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When determining that the ST number counter is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S328. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the ST number counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S310.

In step S328, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the ST count flag of the main RAM 103. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S329.

In step S329, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the ST end command in the main RAM 103. The ST end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the end of ST. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S310.

In step S310, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit is a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S311. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is not a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S315.

In step S311, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process as the control state flag. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S312.

In step S312, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer as a hit start interval time corresponding to a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the hit start interval time in an area of the main RAM 103 that functions as a waiting time timer. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S313. The winning start interval time is also set for each winning type, but in the present embodiment, at least the special probability variation, the special normal, the actual odds of few balls probability, the actual few of bonus balls normal and the special figure (2) small hit-2. The hit start interval time is set to be the same or a time (for example, 1 second) that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

In step S313, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. Thereby, the sub-control circuit 200 comes to recognize the stop of the special symbol effect. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process of step S314.

In step S314, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start command or a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol. The big hit start command or the small hit start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the start of a big hit or a small hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

In step S315, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating a special symbol game ending process as a control state flag. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S316.

In step S316, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. Thereby, the sub-control circuit 200 comes to recognize the stop of the special symbol effect. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

[Hit start interval management processing]
In the following, the subroutine (hit start interval management process) performed in step S104 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S401, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process. When determining that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management processing, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S402. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

In step S402, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S403. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

In step S403, the main CPU 101 sets the special winning opening opening counter upper limit value of the main RAM 103.

In step S404, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special winning opening opening counter of the main RAM 103. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S405.

In step S405, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting an opening/closing pattern for each round or for a small hit depending on the type of the big hit symbol. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S406.

In step S406, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this case, the special winning opening open display command is data indicating the first round. The special winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special winning opening opening command. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S407.

In step S407, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process as the control state flag. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S408.

In step S408, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 103. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S409.

In step S409, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 103. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S410.

In step S410, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variable located in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to open the special winning opening 540. The variables stored in this way drive the special winning opening solenoid 620 to open the special winning opening 540. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

[Winning prize reopening waiting time management processing]
In the following, a subroutine (special winning opening reopening waiting time management process) performed in step S105 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S500, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating a special winning opening reopening waiting time management process. When determining that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management processing, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S501. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

In step S501, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S502. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

In step S502, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special winning opening opening counter of the main RAM 103. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S503.

In step S503, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this case, the special winning opening open display command is data indicating the second and subsequent rounds. The special winning opening open display command data is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. The special winning opening open display command includes an instruction to the sub CPU 201 to perform a round counter +1. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S504.

In step S504, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process as the control state flag. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S505.

In step S505, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the big hit determination in step S118 is a big hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S506. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot determination result is not a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S507.

In step S506, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 103. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S507.

In step S507, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 103. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S508.

In step S508, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

[Prize winning opening process]
In the following, the subroutine (special winning opening opening process) performed in step S106 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S600, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process. In this process, when determining that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S601. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

In step S601, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the special winning opening winning counter is "10" or more. In this process, if the main CPU 101 determines that the special winning opening prize counter is “10” or more, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the special winning opening winning counter is not "10" or more, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S602.

In step S602, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening opening/closing process according to the opening/closing pattern of each set round or small hit. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of opening and closing the special winning opening 540 according to the opening/closing pattern for each round or for the small hit set in step S405. Specifically, the process of opening and closing the special winning opening 540 a plurality of times during a predetermined round is repeated by repeating the process of waiting for time and closing and opening the special winning opening 540 according to the opening/closing pattern of each round or the small hit. I do. When this process ends, the process moves to step S603.

Here, in the present embodiment, the interval time between the first opening and the second opening of the first round of the special probabilistic variation and the special normal, the special opening (2) the first opening and the second opening of the small hit -2. The interval time between opening is set to be the same or a time (for example, 0.1 seconds) that is difficult for the player to distinguish. That is, in the process of step S602, the special probability variation, the special normal, and the special figure (2) small hit -2 are: "0.896 second opening time→0.1 second opening interval time→0.896 second opening" It will be executed in the order of "time". Further, although it is not processed in this step but is set in step S607, the probability of a small amount of actual payout and a small amount of actual payout are usually the same between the first round and the second round. By setting a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 0.1 seconds), the opening time of the first round of 0.896 seconds → the interval time between rounds of 0.1 seconds → 2 rounds of 0.896 seconds It will be executed in the order of "eye open time". As a result, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the winning type even on the basis of the time when the special winning opening 540 is closed.

In step S603, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time timer is “0”. In this process, when determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

In step S604, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting special winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variable located in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to close the special winning opening 540. The variable stored in this manner causes the special winning opening solenoid 620 to be closed. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S605.

In step S605, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. In this processing, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit is a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S610. When determining that the result of the small hit is not a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S606.

In step S606, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special winning opening opening count value is equal to or larger than the special winning opening opening upper limit value. In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the special winning opening opening number count value stored in the main RAM 103 with the special winning opening opening upper limit value or more, and determines that the special winning opening opening count value is the large winning opening opening number. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value or more. When determining that the special winning opening opening count value is not less than the winning opening upper limit value, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S610. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the special winning opening opening count value is not greater than or equal to the winning opening upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time interval display time in the main RAM 103. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S608.

In step S608, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process as the control state flag. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S609.

In step S609, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The display command between rounds is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

In step S610, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 103. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S611.

In step S611, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval process as the control state flag. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S612.

In step S612, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol per interval end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the big hit end display command is set, and when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the small hit end display command is set. The big hit end display command and the small hit end display command are supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

[Hit end interval processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (hit end interval process) executed in step S107 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S700, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value indicating the hit end interval process (06H), the process proceeds to step S701. If it is not determined that the control state flag is the value indicating the hit end interval processing (06H), this subroutine is ended.

In step S701, when the control state flag of the main RAM 103 has a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval process, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the waiting time timer (t) corresponding to the hit end interval to "0". It is determined whether or not. Further, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S702 when the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, and ends the present subroutine when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”.

In step S702, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the process moves to step S703.

In step S703, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting control data corresponding to a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol and a game state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, a game state such as a normal game state or a probability variation state is set as the control data. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a hit end command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Special symbol game end processing]
In the following, with reference to FIG. 21, a subroutine (special symbol game ending process) executed in step S108 of FIG. 11 will be described.

First, in step S710, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game ending process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game ending process, the process proceeds to step S711. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game ending process, this subroutine is ended.

In step S711, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 103 as a control state flag. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Explanation of sub-control circuit operation]
The processing of the sub control circuit 200 will be described below. The sub control circuit 200 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100, and the sub CPU 201 performs various processes such as a display process.

[Sub-control main processing]
First, the sub control main process performed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S1101, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 initializes the work area of the work RAM 203 when the power is turned on. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1102.

In step S1102, the sub CPU 201 performs a random value update process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the random number value stored in the work RAM 203 (for example, the effect determination random value, the big hit effect determination random value, the stop symbol determination random value, etc.). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1103.

In step S1103, the sub CPU 201 performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 203. Details of this processing will be described later. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1104.

In step S1104, the sub CPU 201 performs effect control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the effect using the effect button 62. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1105.

In step S1105, the sub CPU 201 performs display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for displaying in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to the display control circuit 204. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1106.

In the display control circuit 204, when data is received from the sub CPU 201, the VDP of the display control circuit 204, based on the received data, various data such as identification pattern data, background image data, and effect image data. Image data is read from the image data ROM. The VDP superimposes various kinds of image data read from the image data ROM and displays them on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

In step S1106, the sub CPU 201 performs sound/lamp control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the sound generated from the speaker 24 and controls the emission of various lamps such as the lamp 25. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1107.

In step S1107, the sub CPU 201 performs an accessory control process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the operation (mechanical operation or lighting operation) of the movable accessory unit 57 via the accessory control circuit 207. To control the operation of the movable accessory unit 57 performed by the sub CPU 201, the operation of the first movable accessory unit (production device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, and the third movable accessory unit 83 is controlled. Is included. When this process ends, the process moves to the random value update process of step S1102 again.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Even if the sub-control main processing shown in FIG. 22 is being performed, the sub-control main processing may be interrupted and the timer interrupt processing may be performed. The timer interrupt process performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described below with reference to FIG.

In step S1201, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for saving registers. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 moves the process to step S1202.

In step S1202, the sub CPU 201 performs timer update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the timer stored in the work RAM 203. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 updates a timer for round effects and the like. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1203.

In step S1203, the sub CPU 201 performs effect button switch input detection processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 detects whether or not the effect button switch 310 is operated by operating the effect button 62. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1204.

In step S1204, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the value saved in step S201 to each register. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

[Command interrupt processing]
Even if the sub-control main processing shown in FIG. 22 is being executed, the sub-control main processing may be interrupted and the command interrupt processing may be performed. In the following, the command interrupt process performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S1301, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1302.

In step S1302, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for storing the received command in the buffer. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1303.

In step S1303, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the value saved in step S1301 to each register. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

[Command analysis processing]
The subroutine (command analysis process) performed in step S1103 of FIG. 22 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26.

In step S1401, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a received command, the process moves to step S1402. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no received command, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

In step S1402, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of reading the received command. In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads out the command stored in the reception buffer. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1403.

In step S1403, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a special winning opening prize command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the special winning opening prize command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1404. On the other hand, when determining that the received command is not the special winning opening winning command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1405.

In step S1404, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the winning number counter during the big hit and the total winning number counter. In this way, the sub CPU 201 can acquire data relating to the number of prize balls (the number of game balls acquired) which the player has acquired by winning the game balls into the special winning opening 540. The winning number counter during the big hit and the total winning number counter are counted at the start of the big hit game. In this way, data on the number of prize balls is acquired each time a big hit or a small hit is performed. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

In step S1405, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the special symbol designation command, the process moves to step S1406. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the special symbol designating command, it moves the process to step S1407.

In step S1406, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a stop symbol based on the special symbol designation command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

In step S1407, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the special figure variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1408. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the special figure variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1409.

In step S1408, the sub CPU 201 performs the effect pattern determination process based on the special figure variation pattern designation command, the stop symbol, and the extracted random number value for effect determination. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

In step S1409, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine whether or not the received command is a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command). In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a hit start command (a big hit start command, a small hit start command), the sub CPU 201 moves the process to step S1410. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command), the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1411.

In step S1410, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining a big hit start effect. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

In step S1411, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a special winning opening opening effect display command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the special winning opening opening effect display command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1412. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the special winning opening opening effect display command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1413.

In step S1412, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect during opening of the special winning opening. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

In step S1413, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is an inter-round display command. In this processing, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a display command between rounds, the processing is moved to step S1414. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the round display command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1415.

In step S1414, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect between rounds. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

In step S1415, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a hit end display command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the hit end display command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1416. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the hit end display command, the sub CPU 201 moves the process to step S1417.

In step S1416, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect at the end of the big hit. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

In step S1417, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a time saving end command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the time saving end command, the process proceeds to step S1418. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the time saving end command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1419.

In step S1418, the sub CPU 201 performs control such as clearing the time saving flag and ending time saving display. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

In step S1419, the sub CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to the other received command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

[Ordinary electric accessory unit]
The configuration of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 27 to 32.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 includes a base member 410, a front plate portion 420, a guide path 430, a second starting opening 440, a general winning opening 450, and an ordinary electric accessory 460.

A base member 410 shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, and FIGS. 31 and 32 is a base member of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. The base member 410 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is arranged with its plate surface facing the front-rear direction. To the base member 410, various members that form the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 are attached.

The front side plate portion 420 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is a member arranged at the front end portion of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. The front plate portion 420 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is arranged with its plate surface facing forward and backward. The front plate portion 420 faces the base member 410 in the front-rear direction, and is arranged in a state of being separated from the base member 410 forward. In this way, a gap (hereinafter, referred to as "university electrical component space R1") is formed between the front side plate portion 420 and the base member 410 to the extent that a game ball can enter. It should be noted that the ordinary electrical accessory space R1 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the front plate portion 420 and the base member 410 in a front view. The front plate portion 420 is attached to the base member 410 with screws or the like. The front side plate portion 420 is made of a transparent resin material and allows the player to visually recognize the rear side of the front side plate portion 420.

The guiding path 430 shown in FIGS. 27 to 32 is for guiding the moving game ball appropriately in a predetermined direction. The guide path 430 is formed by a substantially plate-shaped member (wall portion) standing upright from the front plate portion 420 toward the rear. The guideway 430 includes a first guideway 431, a second guideway 432, a third guideway 433, a fourth guideway 434 and a fifth guideway 435.

The first guide path 431 is arranged in the vicinity of the upper end of the ordinary electric accessory space R1. The first guide path 431 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from right to left while gently inclining. The first guide path 431 is formed in a substantially central portion of the ordinary utility product space R1 in the left-right direction. The left end portion of the first guide path 431 is formed slightly to the left of the left and right center portion of the ordinary utility product space R1. The right end portion of the first guide path 431 is formed slightly to the right of the left-right center portion of the ordinary utility product space R1. The first guide path 431 thus configured guides the moving game ball from right to left. The first guide path 431 includes a reduction rib 481.

The deceleration rib 481 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guiding path 431 (deceleration means). The deceleration rib 481 is composed of a rear protrusion 481a protruding forward from the base member 410 and a front protrusion 481b protruding rearward from the front plate portion 420. A plurality of rear projections 481a and a plurality of front projections 481b (in the present embodiment, two each) are provided and are spaced from each other along the extending direction (left-right direction) of the first guide path 431. Will be placed.

With such a configuration of the first guide path 431, the game ball (which is moved by the first guide path 431) moves while colliding with the rear side projection 481a and the front side projection 481b, so that the moving speed thereof decreases. It will be.

The second taxiway 432 is arranged in the vicinity of the lower left end of the ordinary electric utility product space R1. The second guide path 432 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from right to left while gently inclining. The second taxiway 432 is formed on the left side of the ordinary electric utility product space R1. The left end portion of the second taxiway 432 is formed at the left end portion of the ordinary utility product space R1. The right end of the second guide path 432 is formed slightly to the left of the left and right center of the general electric utility product space R1. The second guide path 432 thus configured guides the moving game ball from right to left.

The third taxiway 433 is arranged substantially above and to the right of the second taxiway 432 in the space for electric utility goods R1. The third guide path 433 is formed in a substantially curved shape that extends while curving from the left side to the lower right side. The entrance of the third taxiway 433 is the upper left end of the third taxiway 433 and is formed between the left end of the first taxiway 431 and the right end of the second taxiway 432. The entrance of the third taxiway 433 is opened toward the upper left. The third guide path 433 thus configured guides the moving game ball to the lower right. The third guide path 433 includes a guide portion 482.

The guide portion 482 is formed at the bottom of the third guide path 433. The guide portion 482 is a plate-shaped member having a substantially triangular shape in a side view. The guide portion 482 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the third guide path 433 backward.

The fourth taxiway 434 is arranged at the right end of the ordinary electric utility product space R1. The fourth guide path 434 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from the upper right to the lower left while gently inclining. The fourth guide path 434 is formed so as to extend from the upper end portion to the lower end portion of the general electric utility product space R1. The fourth guide path 434 is formed so as to be adjacent to the first guide path 431 on the left and right. The fourth guide path 434 thus formed guides the moving game ball to the lower left. The fourth taxiway 434 includes a reduction rib 483.

The deceleration rib 483 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the fourth guiding path 434 (deceleration means). The deceleration rib 483 is composed of one rear protrusion 483a protruding forward from the base member 410 and two front protrusions 483b protruding rearward from the front plate portion 420. The rear protrusion 483a and the front protrusion 483b are each formed in a longitudinal shape extending in the left-right direction in a side view. Thus, the rear protrusion 483a and the front protrusion 483b are formed so as to be substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the fourth guide path 434 in a front view. The rear protrusion 483a and the front protrusion 483b are arranged so as not to overlap with each other when viewed from the front (not opposed to each other in the front-rear direction but displaced in the vertical direction).

With such a configuration of the fourth guide path 434, the game ball (moved by the fourth guide path 434) moves while colliding with the rear side projection 483a and the front side projection 483b, so that the moving speed thereof decreases. It will be.

The fifth taxiway 435 is arranged below the first taxiway 431 in the space for utility electric vehicles R1. The fifth guide path 435 is formed in a substantially straight line extending downward from above. The upper side of the fifth taxiway 435 is covered by the wall forming the first taxiway 431. The entrance of the fifth taxiway 435 is formed at the upper right end of the fifth taxiway 435 (the upper end of the left side wall forming the fourth taxiway 434). The entrance of the fifth taxiway 435 is opened to the right (the fourth taxiway 434 side). The fifth guide path 435 thus configured guides the moving game ball from above to below. The fifth taxiway 435 includes a guide 484.

The guide 484 is formed at the bottom of the fifth taxiway 435. The guide 484 is a plate-shaped member having a substantially triangular shape in a side view. The guide 484 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the fifth guide path 435 backward.

The second starting port 440 shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 is formed by penetrating the base member 410 in the front-rear direction. The second starting port 440 is formed behind the lowermost portion of the fifth guide path 435 (behind the guide 484). The second starting port 440 includes a second starting port switch 441. The second starting port switch 441 is arranged near the lowermost portion of the fifth taxiway 435 (immediately above the fifth taxiway 435).

The general winning opening 450 shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 is formed by penetrating the base member 410 in the front-rear direction. The general winning opening 450 is formed behind the lowermost portion of the third guide path 433 (behind the guide portion 482). The general winning opening 450 includes a general winning opening switch 451 (see FIG. 5).

The normal electric accessory 460 shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, and FIGS. 31 and 32 includes a blade member 461 and a starting opening solenoid 462.

The blade member 461 is a blade-shaped member. The blade member 461 is rotatably supported by the base member 410 and the front side plate portion 420 via a rotation shaft 463 protruding in the front-rear direction. The blade member 461 is disposed at the entrance of the fifth taxiway 435. In this way, the blade member 461 can open and close the entrance of the fifth taxiway 435. When the blade member 461 opens the entrance of the fifth guide path 435, the tip side of the blade member 461 enters the fourth guide path 434. Thus, when the blade member 461 opens the entrance of the fifth guide path 435, a part of the game ball guided by the fourth guide path 434 is guided into the fifth guide path 435.

The starting opening solenoid 462 drives the blade member 461. The starting port solenoid 462 is arranged behind the base member 410. The starting opening solenoid 462 is configured to be able to transmit the driving force to the blade member 461 via a gear or the like (not shown).

Thus, the normal electric accessory 460 is configured such that the entrance of the fifth guide path 435 can be opened and closed by driving the blade member 461 by the starting opening solenoid 462. Then, when the blade member 461 is opened, a part of the game ball guided by the fourth guide path 434 is guided into the fifth guide path 435, and a state where it is easy to pass to the second starting opening 440. (Open state). Further, when the blade member 461 is closed, the game ball guided by the fourth guide path 434 is not guided into the fifth guide path 435. That is, it becomes a state (closed state) in which it is difficult to pass through the second starting port 440.

In the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 having such a configuration, the moving game ball is guided appropriately in a predetermined direction by the guide path 430.
Note that a description of the rolling mode of the game balls in the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 will be given later.

[Attacker unit]
The configuration of the attacker unit 500 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 33 to 44.

The attacker unit 500 includes a base member 510, a front plate portion 520, a guide path 530, a special winning opening 540, a rear case 550, and a special electric accessory 600.

The base member 510 shown in FIGS. 33 to 38, and FIGS. 40 and 41 is a base member of the attacker unit 500. The base member 510 is formed into an elongated flat plate shape. The base member 510 is arranged such that its longitudinal direction faces the left-right direction and its plate surface faces the front-back direction. Various members forming the attacker unit 500 are attached to the base member 510. A slit 511 is formed in the base member 510.

The slit 511 is formed by penetrating the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The slit 511 is formed in an upper portion of the base member 510 in a substantially straight line shape extending from right to left in a front view while gently inclining. A shutter 610 (more specifically, a guide portion 611 of the shutter 610) described later is arranged in the slit 511.

The front side plate portion 520 shown in FIGS. 33 to 37 and 39 is a member arranged at the front end portion of the attacker unit 500. The front plate portion 520 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the base member 510. The front plate part 520 is arranged with its plate surface facing forward and backward. The front plate portion 520 faces the base member 510 in the front-rear direction, and is arranged in a state of being separated from the base member 510 forward. In this way, a gap (hereinafter referred to as "special electric accessory space R2") is formed between the front side plate portion 520 and the base member 510 to the extent that a game ball can enter. The special electric accessory space R2 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the front plate portion 520 and the base member 510 in a front view. The front plate portion 520 is attached to the base member 510 via screws or the like. The front side plate portion 520 is made of a transparent resin material and allows the player to visually recognize the rear side of the front side plate portion 520.

The guide path 530 shown in FIGS. 33 and 35 to 41 is for guiding the moving game ball in a predetermined direction. The guide path 530 is formed of a shutter 610 and a substantially plate-shaped member (wall portion) that is provided upright from the front plate portion 520 to the rear. The guideway 530 includes a first guideway 531, a second guideway 532, and a third guideway 533.

As described above, the guide path 530 (more specifically, the first guide path 531) is formed by the shutter 610. Here, the shutter 610 is configured to be movable back and forth with respect to the base member 510 via a slit 511, as will be described later. In such a structure of the shutter 610, the first guide path 531 is formed when the shutter 610 advances forward with respect to the base member 510. Therefore, in the following, for convenience, the description will be made assuming that the shutter 610 is in a state of advancing forward with respect to the base member 510 (a state where the first guide path 531 is formed).

The first guide path 531 is arranged near the upper end portion of the special electric accessory space R2. The first guide path 531 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from right to left while gently inclining. The length of the first guide path 531 in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) is slightly shorter than that of the base member 510. The left end of the first guide path 531 is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the special electrical accessory space R2. The right end portion of the first guide path 531 is formed in the vicinity of the right end portion of the special electric accessory space R2. The first guide path 531 thus configured guides the moving game ball from right to left. The first guide path 531 includes a reduction rib 534.

The deceleration rib 534 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guiding path 531 (deceleration means). The deceleration rib 534 is composed of a plurality of rear projections 534a protruding forward from the base member 510 and a plurality of front projections 534b protruding rearward from the front plate portion 520. In this embodiment, six rear projections 534a are provided. Further, five front protrusions 534b are provided. The plurality of rear side protrusions 534a and the plurality of front side protrusions 534b are arranged at appropriate intervals along the extending direction (left-right direction) of the first guide path 531. The appropriate interval is set to be at least longer than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the plurality of rear projections 534a and front projections 534b are arranged so as not to overlap with each other when viewed from the front (not to face in the front-rear direction, but to shift in the left-right direction).

With such a configuration of the first guide path 531, the game ball (moved by the first guide path 531) is, as shown in FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b), a rear projection 534a and a front projection 534b. While colliding with, it moves in a zigzag shape in plan view (because the smooth movement of the game ball is restricted), so the movement speed thereof decreases.

Thus, when the moving speed of the game ball moved by the first guide path 531 is reduced, as shown in FIG. 45(c), a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531. Can create situations. In this way, when a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531, the shutter 610 is opened only once, and the plurality of game balls are guided to the third guide path 533. However, the special winning opening 540 can be won. That is, it is possible to quickly perform round digestion in the big hit game.
Further, even if the shutter 610 has a short opening time, a lot of winning can be generated if a lot of game balls are retained on the shutter 610.
Further, since a large number of game balls can be won at one time, it is easy to generate more prizes (so-called over prizes) than can be won in one round of the big hit game.

The second taxiway 532 is arranged immediately to the right of the first taxiway 531 in the special electric accessory space R2. The second guide path 532 is formed in a substantially linear shape extending from the right side to the left side while gently inclining. The inclination angle of the second guide path 532 is formed to be substantially the same as the inclination angle of the first guide path 531. In this way, the second guide path 532 is configured as one substantially straight guide path that is gently inclined from right to left together with the first guide path 531. The second guide path 532 thus configured guides the moving game ball from right to left (first guide path 531 side).

The third guide path 533 is arranged in a substantially central portion of the special electric accessory space R2 in the vertical direction. The third guide path 533 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from right to left while gently inclining. The third guide path 533 is arranged below the first guide path 531. The third guide path 533 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the first guide path 531 in a front view.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41 and the like, a wall portion connected to the third guide path 533 is arranged between the left end portion of the third guide path 533 and the left end portion of the first guide path 531. Further, a wall portion connected to the third guide path 533 is arranged between the right end portion of the third guide path 533 and the right end portion of the second guide path 532. In this way, the third guide path 533 is formed in a concave shape in a front view.

The third guiding path 533 thus configured guides the moving game ball from the right to the left (the special winning opening 540 side). The third guide path 533 includes a guide portion 535.

The guide portion 535 is formed at the bottom of the third guide path 533. The guide portion 535 is a plate-shaped member having a substantially triangular shape in plan view. The guide portion 535 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the third guide path 533 to the rear.

The special winning opening 540 shown in FIGS. 37, 38, 40 and 41 is formed by the base member 510 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The special winning opening 540 is formed behind the lowermost portion of the third guide path 533 (behind the guide portion 535). The special winning opening 540 includes a count switch 541. As shown in FIG. 37, the count switch 541 is disposed below and behind the special winning opening 540.

The rear case 550 shown in FIG. 33, FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, FIG. 41, FIG. 43, and FIG. 44 is various members (shutter 610, special winning opening solenoid 620, link arm 630, etc.) that constitute the special electric accessory 600. ) Is accommodated. The rear case 550 is formed in a substantially rectangular hollow box shape in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 43, the rear case 550 is divided into an upper space and a lower space by a substantially flat plate-shaped mounting portion 551 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. That is, the rear case 550 is formed in a two-story structure by the mounting portion 551, and predetermined members are arranged in each of the upper space and the lower space. Specifically, the shutter 610, the link arm 630, and the like are arranged in the upper space. Further, a special winning opening solenoid 620 and the like are arranged in the lower space. The rear case 550 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 via a screw or the like. The inside and the outside of the rear case 550 (in front of the base member 510) communicate with each other via a slit 511.

The special electric accessory 600 shown in FIGS. 33, 35 to 38, and 40 to 44 includes a shutter 610, a special winning opening solenoid 620, and a link arm 630.

As shown in FIG. 42C, the shutter 610 includes a guide portion 611, a connecting portion 612, and a rotating shaft 613.

The guide portion 611 is a member that forms the first guide path 531. The guide part 611 is formed in an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The guide portion 611 is arranged such that its plate surface faces the up-down direction and the longitudinal direction faces the left-right direction. The length of the guide portion 611 in the left-right direction is formed to be substantially the same as the slit 511 formed in the base member 510. The length in the front-rear direction of the guide portion 611 (more specifically, the portion of the guide portion 611 that can advance into the special electric accessory space R2) (see L1 shown in FIG. 45A) is the special electric object space. It is formed to be shorter than the length of R2 in the front-rear direction by a predetermined length (see L2 shown in FIG. 45A). That is, even when the guide portion 611 advances into the special electric vehicle material space R2, a gap having a predetermined length is formed between the front end portion of the guide portion 611 and the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520. It In the present embodiment, the gap between the front end portion of the guide portion 611 and the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520 is set to be shorter than the radius of the game ball.

The connecting portion 612 is a member that connects the guiding portion 611 and a rotating shaft 613 described below. The connection part 612 is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape in a plan view. The connecting portion 612 is formed to extend rearward from the central portion of the guiding portion 611 in the left-right direction.

The rotating shaft 613 is a member that receives the transmitted driving force. The rotating shaft 613 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the axial direction directed vertically. The rotating shaft 613 is projected upward from the vicinity of the rear end of the connecting portion 612.

In this way, the shutter 610 is formed as a whole in a substantially convex shape in which the central portion in the left-right direction is convex backward in plan view. The shutter 610 is housed in the rear case 550 with the guide portion 611 inserted in the slit 511. As shown in FIG. 43 and the like, the shutter 610 is mounted on the mounting portion 551 in the rear case 550 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. Note that, hereinafter, the position where the shutter 610 is moved (displaced) rearmost with respect to the mounting portion 551 is referred to as a first position, and the shutter 610 is moved (displaced) most forward with respect to the mounting portion 551. The position is referred to as the second position.

The special winning opening solenoid 620 drives the shutter 610. The special winning opening solenoid 620 is housed in the rear case 550. More specifically, the special winning opening solenoid 620 is arranged in a space below the mounting portion 551 in the rear case 550. The special winning opening solenoid 620 is arranged parallel to the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the shutter 610. As shown in FIG. 42A, the special winning opening solenoid 620 includes a coil portion 621, a case 622, a plunger 623, a spring 624, and a transmission portion 625.

The coil portion 621 is a hollow cylindrical member around which an electric wire is wound. The coil portion 621 is configured to be energizable. Further, the coil portion 621 is configured to be switchable between an excited state when energized and a non-excited state when deenergized. When the coil portion 621 is in an excited state, it can generate a magnetic field inside and pull in the plunger 623.

The case 622 is a member that houses the coil portion 621. The case 622 is formed in the shape of a hollow box having an open upper side. On the right side of the case 622, a hole 626 penetrating in the left-right direction is formed.

The plunger 623 is a substantially columnar member. The plunger 623 is arranged with its axial direction directed in the left-right direction. One end (left side) of the plunger 623 is inserted into the coil portion 621 through the hole 626 of the case 622. The plunger 623 has a protruding position in which the other side (right side) end portion is separated from the coil portion 621 and a non-projection close to the coil portion 621 according to the excited state or the non-excited state of the coil portion 621. The position and the position are displaceable. The other end of the plunger 623 is formed in a flange shape.

The spring 624 is a member that biases the plunger 623 toward the protruding position. The spring 624 is arranged between the case 622 and a transmission portion 625, which will be described later, while being inserted into the plunger 623. The spring 624 always biases the transmission portion 625 in a direction (rightward) away from the case 622.

The transmission unit 625 is a member that transmits the driving force generated by the special winning opening solenoid 620. The transmission part 625 is formed in a substantially box shape in a plan view. The transmission portion 625 is connected to the plunger 623 via a flange-shaped portion formed at the other (left) end portion of the plunger 623. The transmission part 625 is formed with an insertion hole 627 penetrating in the up-down direction in the central part in a plan view. The insertion hole 627 is formed in a long hole shape with the longitudinal direction facing the front-back direction in a plan view.

In the special winning opening solenoid 620 having such a configuration, when the coil portion 621 is in a non-excited state, the plunger 623 (and thus the transmission portion 625) is biased rightward by the spring 624 and is arranged at the projecting position. .. Further, when the coil portion 621 is switched from the non-excited state to the excited state, the plunger 623 (and thus the transmission portion 625) is pulled into the coil portion 621 (moves leftward) against the biasing force of the spring 624. Then, it is placed in a non-protruding position. As described above, in the special winning opening solenoid 620, when the coil portion 621 is switched between the non-excited state and the excited state, the driving force is generated by the displacement of the transmission portion 625.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the special winning opening solenoid 620 appropriately switches the position of the plunger 623 between the projecting position and the non-projecting position in order to generate the driving force. That is, the special winning opening solenoid 620 appropriately displaces the plunger 623 in the left-right direction in order to generate a driving force.

The link arm 630 is a member that transmits the driving force generated by the special winning opening solenoid 620 to the shutter 610. That is, the link arm 630 is a member that constitutes a link mechanism. As shown in FIG. 42(b), the link arm 630 is formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view. A one-side through hole 631 is formed at one end of the link arm 630 so as to penetrate therethrough in the vertical direction. The one-side through hole 631 is formed in a substantially long hole shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction in a plan view. The other side end of the link arm 630 is formed with the other side rotation shaft 632 protruding downward. A central rotation shaft 633 is formed between the one-side through hole 631 of the link arm 630 and the other-side rotation shaft 632 so as to project in the vertical direction.

The link arm 630 having such a structure is rotatably supported in the rear case 550 via the central rotation shaft 633. In this way, the link arm 630 is configured to be rotatable in the clockwise direction in plan view or the counterclockwise direction in plan view about the central rotation shaft 633. Further, the rotation shaft 613 of the shutter 610 is inserted into the one-side through hole 631 of the link arm 630 from below. The other side rotation shaft 632 of the link arm 630 is inserted from above into an insertion hole 627 formed in the transmission portion 625 of the special winning opening solenoid 620.

In the special electric accessory 600 having such a configuration, the driving force generated by the special winning opening solenoid 620 can be transmitted to the shutter 610 via the link arm 630.

Specifically, when the plunger 623 of the special winning opening solenoid 620 shown in FIG. 43 is in the projecting position (the shutter 610 is retracted rearward with respect to the base member 510), the plunger 623 is switched to the non-projecting position. Moves to the left. When the plunger 623 moves to the left, the link arm 630 rotates about the central rotation shaft 633 in the clockwise direction in plan view via the transmission portion 625. When the link arm 630 rotates clockwise in plan view, the shutter 610 moves rearward from the second position to the first position as shown in FIG.

Thus, when the shutter 610 is retracted rearward with respect to the base member 510, the shutter 610 (more specifically, the guide portion 611) is arranged inside the rear case 550 (arranged at the first position). When the guide part 611 of the shutter 610 is arranged in the rear case 550, the first guide path 531 is not formed, so that the game ball can easily enter the third guide path 533 (and thus the special winning opening 540). It becomes a state.

On the other hand, when the plunger 623 of the special winning opening solenoid 620 shown in FIG. 44 is switched to the projecting position from the state where the plunger 623 is in the non-projecting position (the state where the shutter 610 has moved forward with respect to the base member 510), the plunger 623 is shown. Moves to the right. When the plunger 623 moves to the right, the link arm 630 rotates counterclockwise in plan view about the central rotation shaft 633 via the transmission portion 625. When the link arm 630 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, the shutter 610 moves forward from the first position to the second position.

In this way, when the shutter 610 advances toward the front with respect to the base member 510, the shutter 610 (more specifically, the guide portion 611) is arranged in the special electrical accessory space R2 (arranged at the second position). .. When the guide part 611 of the shutter 610 is arranged in the special electric auditors product space R2, the first guide path 531 is formed, so that the game ball does not enter the third guide path 533 (and thus the special winning opening 540). It will be difficult.

In this way, in the special electric accessory 600, the special winning opening solenoid 620 is in a direction different from the direction in which the shutter 610 moves from the first position to the second position (that is, the front-back direction) (that is, the left-right direction). ) Generate driving force. The direction of the driving force generated by the special winning opening solenoid 620 (left-right direction) is converted by the link arm 630 into the direction (front-back direction) in which the shutter 610 moves.

As a result, the direction in which the special winning opening solenoid 620 is driven is different from the direction in which the shutter 610 is moving (the front-back direction) (the left-right direction), and thus the depth of the attacker unit 500 can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the length in the front-rear direction of the guide portion 611 of the shutter 610 (more specifically, the portion of the guide portion 611 that can advance into the special electrical accessory space R2) is the special electrical accessory space R2. Is formed to be shorter than the length in the front-back direction. In this way, the movement distance (that is, the movement distance in the front-back direction) when the shutter 610 moves between the first position and the second position can be shortened, so that the depth of the attacker unit 500 can be narrowed. it can.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the link arm 630 rotates clockwise or in a plan view about the central rotation shaft 633 in response to switching of the position of the plunger 623 in the special winning opening solenoid 620 (non-projecting position or projecting position). It is rotated counterclockwise. Therefore, for example, the position of the rear end portion of the link arm 630 is changed according to the switching of the position of the plunger 623.

Specifically, when the plunger 623 is switched to the projecting position (that is, when the shutter 610 is at the second position), the position of the rear end portion of the link arm 630 is the center rotation axis of the link arm 630. It becomes a portion near 633 (see B10 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, for example, when the plunger 623 is switched to the non-projecting position (that is, when the shutter 610 is at the first position), the position of the rear end portion of the link arm 630 is on the one side of the link arm 630. It becomes a portion in the vicinity of the through hole 631 (see B20 in FIG. 44).

In such a configuration, the position of the rear end portion of the special winning opening solenoid 620 (B30 shown in FIG. 43(b) and FIG. 44(b)) is located behind the link arm 630 regardless of switching of the position of the plunger 623. It is arranged in front of the position of the end portion (see FIGS. 43(b) and 44(b)). That is, the rear end of the special winning opening solenoid 620 is arranged in front of (on the front side of) the rear end of the link arm 630 (end of the rear side of the gaming machine). Thus, the attacker unit 500 is formed compact in the depth direction.

A magnetic detection device 700 for preventing fraudulent activity using a magnet is arranged behind the attacker unit 500 (more specifically, behind the left part of the rear case 550) (FIG. 43 and FIG. 43). (See FIG. 44). As described above, in this embodiment, the attacker unit 500 is compactly formed in the depth direction, so that a space for arranging other game parts is provided behind the attacker unit 500.

In the attacker unit 500 having such a configuration, the moving game ball is guided in a predetermined direction by the guide path 530 as appropriate.
Note that a description of the rolling mode of the game balls in the attacker unit 500 will be given later.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51, the rolling mode of the game ball in the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 and the attacker unit 500 will be described in detail.

First, the mutual positional relationship between the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 and the attacker unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 46, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged above the attacker unit 500. The left end portion of the second guide path 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged to the right of the left end portion of the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500 in the left-right direction. That is, the game ball guided by the second guide path 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is released from the second guide path 432 and then drops (rolls) to the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500. can do.

Further, the right end portions of the second guide path 532 and the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the extending direction (lower left) of the fourth guide path 434 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. That is, the game ball guided by the fourth guide path 434 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is discharged from the fourth guide path 434, and then the second guide path 532 or the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500. Can fall to the right end.

In the following, the rolling mode of the game balls in the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 and the attacker unit 500 will be described by specifically exemplifying the game balls rolling in the game area 20.

In FIG. 47, three game balls (game ball Pa1, game ball Pb1, and game ball Pc1) are illustrated as the game balls rolling in the game area 20.
First, of the three game balls, the rolling mode of the game ball Pa1 will be described below.

The game ball Pa1 has dropped (rolled) to the center of the normal electric accessory unit 400 in the left-right direction. Such a game ball Pa1 falls on the first guide path 431 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, as shown in FIG. 48(a). The game ball Pa1 dropped on the first guide path 431 is guided (rolled) to the lower left by the first guide path 431 (see the game ball Pa2 shown in FIG. 48(a)).

The game ball Pa2 shown in FIG. 48(a) is guided to the lower left by the first guide path 431 and then discharged to the outside of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. In this way, the game ball Pa2 released to the outside of the normal electric accessory unit 400 falls to the lower left as it is (see the game ball Pa3 shown in FIG. 47) or collides with the nearest game nail 68 to the right. The ball is rolled downward (see the game ball PA3 shown in FIG. 47).

Thus, the game ball PA3 shown in FIG. 47 is guided to the third guide path 433 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 when rolled to the lower right. In this way, the game ball PA3 guided to the third guide path 433 is guided to the lower right by the third guide path 433 and wins the general winning opening 450 (see the game ball PA4 shown in FIG. 48(b)). ..

On the other hand, the game ball Pa3 shown in FIG. 47 is guided to the second guide path 432 of the ordinary electric auditors product unit 400 when it falls to the lower left as it is. In this way, the game ball Pa3 guided to the second guide path 432 is guided (rolled) to the lower left by the second guide path 432 and discharged to the outside of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 (FIG. 48). (B) and the game ball Pa4 shown in FIG. 49).

In this way, the game ball Pa4 released to the outside of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is the attacker when the shutter 610 is arranged at the second position (when the first guide path 531 is formed). It falls on the first guide path 531 of the unit 500 (see the game ball Pa5 shown in FIG. 50(a)). On the other hand, in the attacker unit 500, when the shutter 610 is arranged at the first position (when the first guide path 531 is not formed), the shutter 610 is provided on the third guide path 533 of the attacker unit 500. It falls (see the game ball Pa5 shown in FIG. 50(b)).

In this way, the game ball dropped on the first guide path 431 of the normal electric accessory unit 400, the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500 or the first guide path 531 or the second guide path 432 of the normal electric accessory unit 400. It is possible to roll to the third guiding path 533, and to win the special winning opening 540 according to the timing of movement of the shutter 610.

Next, among the three game balls, the rolling mode of the game ball Pb1 and the game ball Pc1 will be described.

The game ball Pb1 and the game ball Pc1 shown in FIG. 47 are falling (rolling) toward the right portion of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. Thus, the game ball Pb1 and the game ball Pc1 falling to the right portion of the normal electric auditors product unit 400 enter into the fourth taxiway 434 of the normal electric auditors product unit 400.

Of the game balls that have entered the fourth guide path 434, the game ball Pb1 that is falling in the left part of the fourth guide path 434 is the case where the blade member 461 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened. It is guided to the fifth guide path 435 by the blade member 461 (see the game ball Pb2 shown in FIG. 48(a)). In this way, the game ball Pb2 guided to the fifth guide path 435 wins the second starting opening 440. Further, the game ball Pb1 falling in the left part of the fourth guide path 434 is as it is (without being guided to the fifth guide path 435) when the blade member 461 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed. It drops in the fourth guide path 434 (see the game ball Pb2 shown in FIG. 48(b)).

In addition, the game ball Pc1 falling in the right portion of the fourth guideway 434 is guided to the lower left by the fourth guideway 434, and is guided as it is to the other guideway without being guided to the other guideway. It falls in the guide path 434 (see the game ball Pc2 shown in FIG. 48(a) and FIG. 49). In this way, the game ball Pc2 that has fallen in the fourth guide path 434 is released to the outside of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, and then drops onto the second guide path 532 of the attacker unit 500. The game ball Pc2 that has dropped onto the second guide path 532 is guided to the lower left by the second guide path 532 (see the game ball Pc3 shown in FIG. 50).

Thus, the game ball Pc3 guided to the lower left by the second guide path 532 is the second guide when the shutter 610 is arranged at the second position (when the first guide path 531 is formed). It is guided to the first guide path 531 via the path 532. Then, the game ball Pc3 is guided to the lower left by the first guide path 531.

In addition, the game ball Pc3 guided to the lower left by the second guide path 532 when the shutter 610 is arranged at the first position (when the first guide path 531 is not formed), or the first guide path. When the shutter 610 moves to the second position while being guided by the path 531, it falls on the third guiding path 533 (see the game ball Pc4 shown in FIG. 50(b)).

In this way, the game ball that has dropped in the fourth guide path 434 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is transferred to the first guide path 531 or the third guide path 533 via the second guide path 532 of the attacker unit 500. It can roll and can win the special winning opening 540 according to the timing of movement of the shutter 610.

Here, in the present embodiment, as a route of the game ball guided to the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500, as described above, the guide is provided via the second guide path 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. An incoming route (hereinafter referred to as “first route”) and a route guided via the second guiding path 532 of the attacker unit 500 (hereinafter referred to as “second route”), Is provided.

In this way, since the game ball can be guided to the first guide path 531 (and thus the third guide path 533) of the attacker unit 500 by two routes, more game balls than when there is only one route. Can be won in the special winning opening 540 in a short period of time. That is, it is possible to win (pass) a large number of game balls at once to the special winning opening 540 without providing a dedicated driving means. As a result, it is possible to quickly perform round digestion in the big hit game.

In addition, since there are two routes of the game balls guided to the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500, as shown in FIG. 50(a), they are guided to the first guide path 531 by different routes. Game balls may collide with each other. In such a case, the game ball from the first route (see the game ball Pa5 shown in FIG. 51(a)) falls from above, so that the game ball from the second route (see FIG. 51(a)) In some cases, the guidance to the lower left of the game ball Pc3 shown) may be hindered. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 51(b), the game ball Pa5 that has dropped from above collides with the game ball Pc3 that is guided to the lower left, and moves to the upper right of the first guide path 531. (See the game ball Pc4 shown in FIG. 50(b)).

In this way, the second guide path 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is formed at a position where the released game ball can collide with the game ball rolling on the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500. Further, the second guide path 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 causes the released game ball to collide with the game ball rolling on the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500 to roll on the first guide path 531. The game ball can be temporarily reversed (it can be moved to the upper right).

In this way, when the game ball Pc3 moves to the upper right of the first guide path 531, the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guide path 531 can be further reduced, and by extension, the first guide path. It becomes easy to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are moving on 531. That is, since it is easy to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531, it is possible to win a large number of game balls at once to the special winning opening 540 without providing a dedicated drive means. You can As a result, it is possible to quickly perform round digestion in the big hit game.

The special winning opening 540 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the passage area.
Further, the shutter 610 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the displacement member.
Further, the special winning opening solenoid 620 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the driving means.
Further, the speed reduction rib 534 and the first guide path 531 according to the present embodiment are one embodiment of the speed reduction means.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a pachislot gaming machine, for example.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special winning opening 540 is illustrated as an example of the passage area, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Further, in the present embodiment, the shutter 610 is illustrated as an example of the displacement member, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Further, in the present embodiment, the deceleration rib 534 and the first guide path 531 are illustrated as an example of the deceleration means, but a configuration different from these may be adopted.
Hereinafter, the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500 according to another example will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53.

In the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500 according to another example, the point different from the above-described configuration is that the gap between the front end portion of the guide portion 611 and the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520 becomes That is, it is formed to be longer than the radius and shorter than the diameter.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 52(a) and (b), the game ball rolling on the first guide path 531 is the front end of the guide portion 611 and the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520. The first guide path 531 rolls in a state where a part of the first guide path 531 is fitted into the gap (a part thereof is below the upper surface of the guide portion 611). In this way, the game ball can lengthen the flow path. Further, when the game ball rolls on the first guide path 531, it rolls while contacting the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520. In this way, since the game ball rolls while contacting with other members, the moving speed of the game ball can be effectively reduced.

Further, the game ball will collide with the front projection 534b formed on the front plate portion 520 when rolling on the first guide path 531. Thus, when the game ball rolls over the colliding front projection 534b, as shown in FIG. 53A, in order to avoid the front projection 534b, it moves in a direction away from the front plate portion 520. .. Here, since a part of the game ball has dropped below the upper surface of the guide portion 611, in order to move in the direction away from the front side plate portion 520, the dropped state needs to be canceled once. There is. That is, as shown in FIG. 53(b), the game ball consumes energy in order to increase the height from the depressed state, and the moving speed is effectively reduced.

The moving speed of the game ball can be set to a desired value by appropriately setting the gap between the front end portion of the guide portion 611 and the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520.

[Configuration of second movable accessory unit 82]
The schematic configuration of the second movable accessory unit 82 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 54 to 59.

The second movable accessory unit 82 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. The second movable accessory unit 82 mainly includes a base member 1500, a first movable body 1600, a second movable body 1700, and movement control means 1800.

The base member 1500 is provided with a first movable body 1600, a second movable body 1700, and movement control means 1800. The first movable body 1600 is arranged in front of the base member 1500, and the second movable body 1700 is arranged in rear of the base member 1500. The movement control means 1800 can appropriately move the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 with respect to the base member 1500. Specifically, the movement control unit 1800 can move the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 to a standby position (see FIG. 54) or an effect position (see FIG. 69) described later. By moving the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 at an appropriate timing, a visual impression can be given to the player.

The configuration of each member of the second movable accessory unit 82 will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 54 to 74.

[Structure of base member 1500]
The base member 1500 shown in FIGS. 54 to 59 supports the respective members forming the second movable accessory unit 82. The base member 1500 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing the front-rear direction. The base member 1500 is formed in a generally rectangular shape in a front view with the longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction. The base member 1500 mainly includes an opening 1510, a sliding rod 1520, and an arc hole 1530.

The opening 1510 is a portion formed so as to penetrate the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction. The opening 1510 is formed in the lower left and right center of the base member 1500. Specifically, the opening portion 1510 is formed so as to cut out from the lower end portion in the left and right center portion of the base member 1500 to the upper and lower substantially center portions. The opening 1510 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

The sliding bar 1520 (see FIG. 56) guides the first movable body 1600. A pair of left and right sliding rods 1520 are provided at the left and right center of the base member 1500. The sliding rod 1520 is formed in a substantially columnar shape. The sliding rod 1520 is arranged with its axial direction oriented vertically. The sliding rods 1520 are respectively arranged on the left and right of the opening 1510 in a front view. The sliding rod 1520 (more specifically, the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the sliding rod 1520) is appropriately fixed to the front side surface of the base member 210.

The arc-shaped hole 1530 penetrates the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction. The arcuate holes 1530 are formed near the left and right ends of the base member 1500, respectively. The arc-shaped hole 1530 is formed in an arc shape centered on a rotation shaft 1750 described later in a front view.

[Configuration of the first movable body 1600]
The first movable body 1600 shown in FIGS. 54, 55, 58, 60, and 61 is movably supported in the vertical direction with respect to the base member 1500, and a part of the first movable body 1600 itself is supported. It can also be moved (rotated). The first movable body 1600 is attached to one surface side (front surface side) of the base member 1500, and thus is arranged in front of the base member 1500. The first movable body 1600 mainly includes a base member 1610, a movable body 1620, a movement control means 1630, and a cover member 1640.

The base member 1610 shown in FIG. 55 supports each member that constitutes the first movable body 1600. The base member 1610 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing the front-rear direction. The base member 1610 is formed in a generally rectangular shape in a front view with the longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction. The base member 1610 is arranged in front of the center portion (sliding rod 1520) of the base member 1500 on the left and right sides. The base member 1610 is slidably connected to the sliding rod 1520. As a result, the base member 1610 is guided by the sliding rod 1520 so as to be movable along the axial direction (that is, the vertical direction) of the sliding rod 1520. The base member 1610 mainly includes a through hole 1611 and a connecting shaft 1612.

The through hole 1611 penetrates the base member 1610 in the front-rear direction. The through holes 1611 are formed on the right side and the left side of the center of the base member 1610 (left and right), respectively.

The connecting shaft 1612 is a substantially columnar member. The connecting shaft 1612 is arranged with its axial direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The connecting shafts 1612 are provided at both left and right ends of the base member 1610. The rear end of the connecting shaft 1612 is fixed while being inserted into the right end and the left end of the base member 1610.

The movable body 1620 shown in FIGS. 54, 60 and 61 is movably (rotatably) supported with respect to the base member 1610. A pair of left and right movable bodies 1620 is provided with respect to the base member 1610. The left and right movable bodies 1620 are formed substantially symmetrically. Therefore, hereinafter, the configuration of the movable body 1620 on the right side will be specifically described, and the description of the configuration of the movable body 1620 on the left side will be appropriately omitted. The movable body 1620 mainly includes a base member 1621, a substrate 1622, a light diffusing member 1623, a cover member 1624, and a rotating shaft 1625.

The base member 1621 shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 supports each member that constitutes the first movable body 1600. The base member 1621 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing the front-rear direction. The base member 1621 has a longitudinal direction oriented substantially in the left-right direction and is formed in a sharpened shape with a sharp right end. The base member 1621 mainly includes a cylindrical portion 1621a and an elongated hole 1621b.

The cylindrical portion 1621a is a portion formed in a cylindrical shape with the axial direction facing the front-rear direction. The cylindrical portion 1621a is formed near the left end of the base member 1621.

The long hole 1621b penetrates the base member 1621 in the front-rear direction. The long hole 1621b is formed near the left end of the base member 1621 (immediately right of the cylindrical portion 1621a). The long hole 1621b is formed so as to linearly extend from the vicinity of the cylindrical portion 1621a toward the right (the right end side of the base member 1610) by a predetermined distance.

The board 1622 shown in FIG. 61 is one on which electronic components (functional components) are mounted. The substrate 1622 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the substrate 1622 is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the base member 1610, and is formed into a shape that is substantially along the base member 1610. On the front surface of the substrate 1622, a plurality of LEDs 1622a are arranged at appropriate intervals. The substrate 1622 is fixed to the front surface of the base member 1621.

The light diffusion member 1623 appropriately diffuses the light emitted from the LED 1622a. The light diffusion member 1623 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the light diffusion member 1623 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the substrate 1622. The light diffusion member 1623 is formed of a material having a light-transmitting property. The light diffusing member 1623 is formed with appropriate irregularities so that the light passing through the light diffusing member 1623 is diffused. The light diffusion member 1623 is arranged in front of the substrate 1622 so as to cover the substrate 1622 from the front. The light diffusion member 1623 is fixed to the base member 1621 via the substrate 1622 as appropriate.

The cover member 1624 is provided with appropriate decoration. The cover member 1624 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the cover member 1624 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base member 1621. The cover member 1624 is formed of a light-transmitting material. The cover member 1624 is arranged in front of the base member 1621 and the like so as to cover the base member 1621, the substrate 1622, and the light diffusion member 1623 from the front. The cover member 1624 is fixed to the base member 1621.

The rotating shaft 1625 shown in FIGS. 54 and 60 is a substantially columnar member. The rotating shaft 1625 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 1621a of the base member 1621 with its axial direction facing the front-rear direction. The rear end of the rotating shaft 1625 is fixed in a state of being inserted into a right-side through hole 1611 (see FIG. 55) formed in the base member 1610. In this way, the base member 1621 of the movable body 1620 is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1610 via the rotation shaft 1625.

The right movable body 1620 configured in this manner is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1610 about the rotation shaft 1625. When the LED 1622a mounted on the substrate 1622 is turned on, the light from the LED 322 is diffused by the light diffusing member 1623 and is applied to the cover member 1624. This makes it possible to make the decoration applied to the cover member 1624 stand out.

Similar to the right movable body 1620, the left movable body 1620 is rotatably supported by the base member 1610 via the rotation shaft 1625. The rotary shaft 1625 supporting the left movable body 1620 is fixed while being inserted into the left through hole 1611 (see FIG. 55) formed in the base member 1610.

The movement control means 1630 shown in FIGS. 57, 59, 60, and 62 controls the movement (rotation) of the movable body 1620. The movement control means 1630 mainly includes a motor 1631 and a driving force transmission mechanism 1632.

A motor 1631 shown in FIGS. 57 and 59 is a drive source for moving the movable body 1620. The motor 1631 is fixed to the lower portion of the back surface (rear surface) of the base member 1610. An output shaft (not shown) of the motor 1631 is provided so as to penetrate the base member 1610 in the front-rear direction and project forward from the base member 1610.

The driving force transmission mechanism 1632 shown in FIGS. 60 and 62 transmits the driving force generated by the motor 1631 to the movable body 1620. The driving force transmission mechanism 1632 is appropriately supported on the front surface of the base member 1610. The driving force transmission mechanism 1632 mainly includes an output gear 1632a, a right first transmission gear 1632b, a right second transmission gear 1632c, a left first transmission gear 1632d, a left second transmission gear 1632e and a left third transmission gear 1632f.

The output gear 1632a extracts the driving force of the motor 1631. The output gear 1632a is fixed to the front end portion of the output shaft of the motor 1631.

The first right transmission gear 1632b and the second right transmission gear 1632c are sequentially arranged on the right side of the output gear 1632a. The output gear 1632a, the right first transmission gear 1632b, and the right second transmission gear 1632c are meshed with each other. A cylindrical transmission shaft portion 1632g protruding forward from the right second transmission gear 1632c is formed in the vicinity of the outer peripheral end portion of the right second transmission gear 1632c. The transmission shaft portion 1632g is inserted into the elongated hole 1621b of the right movable body 1620.

The first left transmission gear 1632d, the second left transmission gear 1632e, and the third left transmission gear 1632f are sequentially arranged on the left side of the output gear 1632a. The output gear 1632a, the left first transmission gear 1632d, the left second transmission gear 1632e, and the left third transmission gear 1632f are meshed with each other. A cylindrical transmission shaft portion 1632h protruding forward from the left third transmission gear 1632f is formed near the outer peripheral end of the left third transmission gear 1632f. The transmission shaft portion 1632h is inserted into the elongated hole 1621b of the left movable body 1620.

The cover member 1640 shown in FIG. 54 is appropriately decorated. The cover member 1640 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing the front-rear direction. The cover member 1640 is arranged in front of the movement control means 1630 so as to cover the movement control means 1630 from the front. The cover member 1640 is fixed to the base member 1610. Appropriate decoration is applied to a part of the front surface of the cover member 1640.

The first movable body 1600 configured as described above is configured as a single movable body that can be moved in the vertical direction by the movement control unit described later. The vertical movement of the first movable body 1600 will be described later in detail.

Further, the first movable body 1600 can move (rotate) the movable body 1620 by the movement control means 1630. Specifically, when the motor 1631 is driven and the output gear 1632a is rotated clockwise in the rear view as shown in FIG. 63, the second right transmission gear 1632c is rotated in the rear view clockwise via the first right transmission gear 1632b. Rotate to. When the right second transmission gear 1632c rotates, the transmission shaft portion 1632g formed on the right second transmission gear 1632c pushes the elongated hole 1621b of the right movable body 1620 downward. As a result, the movable body 1620 on the right side rotates counterclockwise in rear view about the rotation shaft 1625.

When the output gear 1632a is rotated clockwise in rear view, the third left transmission gear 1632f is rotated counterclockwise in rear view via the first left transmission gear 1632d and the second left transmission gear 1632e. When the left third transmission gear 1632f rotates, the transmission shaft portion 1632h formed on the left third transmission gear 1632f pushes the elongated hole of the left movable body 1620 downward. As a result, the left movable body 1620 rotates about the rotation shaft 1625 clockwise in the rear view.

When the motor 1631 is driven in the opposite direction (that is, the output gear 1632a is rotated counterclockwise in rear view), the movable body 1620 on the right side is rotated clockwise in rear view and the left side is rotated, contrary to the above. The movable body 1620 can be rotated counterclockwise in rear view.

Thus, the first movable body 1600 can rotate the pair of left and right movable bodies 1620 at the same time by driving the motor 1631. In the following description, the right movable body 1620 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front and the left movable body 1620 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front as much as possible (the pair of left and right movable bodies 1620 is left and right). The position where the movable body 1620 is rotated so as to spread (see FIGS. 54 and 60) is referred to as a standby position of the movable body 1620. Further, the movable body 1620 on the right side is maximally rotated clockwise in the front view, and the movable body 1620 on the left maximally rotated counterclockwise in the front view (the pair of left and right movable bodies 1620 are both downward. The position where the movable body 1620 is rotated so as to face (refer to FIGS. 64 and 68) is referred to as a performance position of the movable body 1620.

[Configuration of second movable body 1700]
The second movable body 1700 shown in FIGS. 55, 57, 58, 59, and 65 is movably (rotatably) supported with respect to the base member 1500. The second movable body 1700 is attached to the other surface side (rear surface side) of the base member 1500 and is thus arranged rearward of the base member 1500. The second movable body 1700 is provided as a left and right pair with respect to the base member 1500. The left and right second movable bodies 1700 are formed substantially symmetrically with the left and right center of the base member 1500 interposed therebetween. Therefore, hereinafter, the configuration of the second movable body 1700 on the right side will be specifically described, and the description of the configuration of the second movable body 1700 on the left side will be appropriately omitted. The second movable body 1700 mainly includes a base member 1710, a substrate 1720, a light diffusion member 1730, a cover member 1740, and a rotating shaft 1750.

The base member 1710 shown in FIGS. 57, 59, and 65 supports each member that constitutes the second movable body 1700. The base member 1710 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing the front-rear direction. The base member 1710 is formed in a horizontally long shape with the longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction. The base member 1710 mainly includes a cylindrical portion 1711 and an elongated hole 1712.

The cylindrical portion 1711 is a portion formed in a cylindrical shape with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The cylindrical portion 1711 is formed near the right end of the base member 1710.

The long hole 1712 penetrates the base member 1710 in the front-rear direction. The elongated hole 1712 is formed near the right end of the base member 1710 (immediately below and right of the cylindrical portion 1711). The elongated hole 1712 is formed so as to linearly extend from the vicinity of the cylindrical portion 1711 toward the lower right (the lower right side of the base member 1710) by a predetermined distance.

The board 1720 shown in FIG. 65 has electronic components (functional components) mounted thereon. The substrate 1720 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the substrate 1720 is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the base member 1710, and is formed into a shape that is substantially along the base member 1710. A plurality of LEDs 1721 are arranged on the front surface of the substrate 1720 at appropriate intervals. The substrate 1720 is fixed to the front surface of the base member 1710.

The light diffusion member 1730 appropriately diffuses the light emitted from the LED 1721. The light diffusion member 1730 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the light diffusion member 1730 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the substrate 1720. The light diffusing member 1730 is formed of a light-transmitting material. The light diffusing member 1730 is formed with appropriate irregularities so that the light passing through the light diffusing member 1730 is diffused. The light diffusion member 1730 is arranged in front of the substrate 1720 so as to cover the substrate 1720 from the front. The light diffusion member 1730 is fixed to the base member 1710.

The cover member 1740 is provided with appropriate decoration. The cover member 1740 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the cover member 1740 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base member 1710. The cover member 1740 is formed of a translucent material. The cover member 1740 is arranged in front of the base member 1710 and the like so as to cover the base member 1710, the substrate 1720, and the light diffusion member 1730 from the front. The cover member 1740 is fixed to the base member 1710.

The rotating shaft 1750 shown in FIGS. 55, 57 and 59 is a substantially columnar member. The rotating shaft 1750 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 1711 of the base member 1710 with the axial direction facing the front-rear direction. The front portion of the rotating shaft 1750 is inserted into the lower right portion of the base member 1500. In this way, the base member 1710 of the second movable body 1700 is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1500 via the rotation shaft 1750.

The second movable body 1700 on the right side configured as described above is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1500 about the rotation shaft 1750. When the LED 1721 mounted on the substrate 1720 is turned on, the light from the LED 1721 is diffused by the light diffusing member 1730 and is applied to the cover member 1740. This makes it possible to make the decoration applied to the cover member 1740 stand out.

Like the second movable body 1700 on the right side, the second movable body 1700 on the left side is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1500 via the rotation shaft 1750. The rotary shaft 1750 supporting the left second movable body 1700 is inserted into the lower left portion of the base member 1500.

[Configuration of movement control means 1800]
The movement control means 1800 shown in FIGS. 55, 57, and 66 controls the movement of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700. The movement control means 1800 is formed substantially symmetrically. Therefore, hereinafter, the configuration of the right half portion (right side) of the movement control means 1800 will be specifically described, and the description of the configuration of the left half portion (left side) of the movement control means 1800 will be appropriately omitted. The movement control unit 1800 mainly includes a motor 1810 and a driving force transmission mechanism 1820.

A motor 1810 shown in FIGS. 55 and 66 is a drive source for moving the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700. The motor 1810 is fixed to the upper right portion of the base member 1500. The motor 1810 is arranged so that its output shaft (not shown) faces rearward.

The driving force transmission mechanism 1820 transmits the driving force generated by the motor 1810 to the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700. The driving force transmission mechanism 1820 is appropriately supported by the base member 1500. The driving force transmission mechanism 1820 mainly includes an output gear 1821, a first transmission gear 1822, a second transmission gear 1823, an arm 1824, a third transmission gear 1825, and a fourth transmission gear 1826.

The output gear 1821 (see FIG. 57) extracts the driving force of the motor 1810. The output gear 1821 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft of the motor 1810.

The first transmission gear 1822 is arranged substantially to the left of the output gear 1821 and meshes with the output gear 1821.

The second transmission gear 1823 is arranged substantially below the first transmission gear 1822 and meshes with the first transmission gear 1822. The second transmission gear 1823 mainly includes a transmission shaft portion 1823a.

The transmission shaft portion 1823a is a substantially columnar member. The transmission shaft portion 1823a is arranged with its axial direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The transmission shaft portion 1823a is arranged at a position (an eccentric position) apart from the center of the second transmission gear 1823 by a predetermined distance in a front view. The rear end portion of the transmission shaft portion 1823a is fixed while being inserted into the second transmission gear 1823.

The arm 1824 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing the front-rear direction. The arm 1824 is arranged with the longitudinal direction thereof oriented substantially in the left-right direction. The arm 1824 is arranged immediately in front of the second transmission gear 1823. The arm 1824 mainly includes a rotating shaft 1824a, a first elongated hole 1824b, a second elongated hole 1824c, and a gear portion 1824d.

The rotating shaft 1824a is a substantially columnar member. The rotating shaft 1824a is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The rotating shaft 1824a is arranged below the motor 1810 in a front view. The rear end of the rotating shaft 1824a is fixed while being inserted into the base member 1500. The front end of the rotating shaft 1824a is inserted into one end (right end) of the arm 1824. In this way, the arm 1824 is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1500 via the rotation shaft 1824a.

The first elongated hole 1824b penetrates the arm 1824 in the front-rear direction. The first elongated hole 1824b is formed at the center of the arm 1824 in the longitudinal direction. The first elongated hole 1824b is formed to extend linearly along the longitudinal direction of the arm 1824 by a predetermined distance. The transmission shaft portion 1823a of the second transmission gear 1823 is inserted into the first elongated hole 1824b.

The second elongated hole 1824c penetrates the arm 1824 in the front-rear direction. The second elongated hole 1824c is formed at the other end (left end) of the arm 1824. The second elongated hole 1824c is formed so as to extend linearly along the longitudinal direction of the arm 1824 by a predetermined distance. The right side connecting shaft 1612 of the base member 1610 is inserted into the second elongated hole 1824c.

The gear portion 1824d is formed at one end (right end) of the arm 1824. The gear portion 1824d is formed so that its teeth are oriented substantially downward. The teeth of the gear portion 1824d are formed so as to be arranged in an arc shape centered on the rotation shaft 1824a in a front view.

The third transmission gear 1825 is arranged substantially below the arm 1824 (gear portion 1824d) and meshes with the gear portion 1824d of the arm 1824.

The fourth transmission gear 1826 is arranged substantially to the right of the third transmission gear 1825 and meshes with the third transmission gear 1825. The front end portion of the rotating shaft 1750 of the second movable body 1700 on the right side is inserted into the fourth transmission gear 1826. In this way, the fourth transmission gear 1826 can rotate about the same axis (rotating shaft 1750) as the second movable body 1700 on the right side. The fourth transmission gear 1826 mainly includes an arm portion 1826a and a connecting shaft 1826b.

The arm portion 1826a is a substantially plate-shaped portion when the plate surface is oriented in the front-rear direction. The arm portion 1826a is formed so as to extend in the lower right direction from the center (the rotation shaft 1750) of the fourth transmission gear 1826 in a front view. A front end portion (lower right end portion) of the arm portion 1826a is formed so as to overlap with the arcuate hole 1530 on the right side of the base member 1500 in a front view.

The connecting shaft 1826b connects the fourth transmission gear 1826 (arm portion 1826a) and the second movable body 1700. The connecting shaft 1826b is formed in a substantially columnar shape. The connecting shaft 1826b is arranged with its axial direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The front end portion of the connecting shaft 1826b is inserted into the tip end portion (lower right end portion) of the arm portion 1826a. The middle part of the connecting shaft 1826b is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 1530 of the base member 1500. The rear end portion of the connecting shaft 1826b is inserted into the elongated hole 1712 formed in the base member 1710 of the second movable body 1700 on the right side.

[Movement of first movable body 1600 and second movable body 1700]
The first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be moved by the movement control means 1800 configured as described above. Specifically, when the motor 1810 is driven and the output gear 1821 is rotated clockwise in rear view (see FIG. 57), the second transmission gear 1823 is viewed in front through the first transmission gear 1822 (see FIG. 67). Rotate counterclockwise. When the second transmission gear 1823 rotates, the transmission shaft portion 1823a provided on the second transmission gear 1823 pushes down the first elongated hole 1824b of the arm 1824. As a result, the arm 1824 rotates counterclockwise in a front view about the rotation shaft 1824a.

When the arm 1824 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front, the base member 1610 of the first movable body 1600 is pushed down via the connecting shaft 1612. As a result, the first movable body 1600 moves downward (see FIGS. 67 to 70).

As described above, the force (rotational force) in the rotation direction of the second transmission gear 1823 is converted into the force in the linear direction (vertical direction) by the arm 1824 (second elongated hole 1824c). Further, the force in the linear direction is transmitted to the first movable body 1600 by the arm 1824 (second elongated hole 1824c).

When the arm 1824 (gear portion 1824d) rotates counterclockwise in front view, the fourth transmission gear 1826 rotates counterclockwise in front view via the third transmission gear 1825. When the fourth transmission gear 1826 rotates, the right second movable body 1700 connected to the fourth transmission gear 1826 (arm portion 1826a) via the connecting shaft 1826b also rotates counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 67). To FIG. 70).

In this way, by driving the motor 1810, the first movable body 1600 can be moved downward, and at the same time, the second movable body 1700 can be rotated counterclockwise in a front view.

When the motor 1810 is driven in the opposite direction (that is, the output gear 1821 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear (see FIG. 57)), the first movable body 1600 is moved upward, at the same time, contrary to the above. The second movable body 1700 on the right side can be rotated clockwise in a front view.

Here, the motor 1631 is provided on the back surface of the first movable body 1600 (base member 1610), but the base member 1500 arranged behind the first movable body 1600 interferes with the motor 1631. The opening 1510 is formed so as to avoid Therefore, even if the first movable body 1600 is moved up and down, the motor 1631 and the base member 1500 do not come into contact with each other.

In the above description, the operation of the right half part of the movement control means 1800 has been described, but the same applies to the operation of the left half part. That is, by simultaneously driving the left and right motors 1810, the first movable body 1600 is moved up and down, and at the same time, the left and right second movable bodies 1700 are rotated (that is, the right side second movable body 1700 is viewed from the front). The second movable body 1700 on the left side can be rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, while being rotated clockwise.

In the following, the position of the first movable body 1600 (the position where the first movable body 1600 is substantially raised to the maximum) in the state where the second transmission gear 1823 is fully rotated clockwise in the front view (FIGS. 54, 55 and 66). (Refer to) is referred to as a standby position of the first movable body 1600. Further, the position of the first movable body 1600 (the position where the first movable body 1600 is lowered to the maximum) when the second transmission gear 1823 is rotated counterclockwise to the maximum in the front view (see FIGS. 67 to 70). , And the production position of the first movable body 1600.

When the first movable body 1600 is in the standby position, most of the first movable body 1600 is located behind (behind) the game board 17 and the stage 42 (concealed), so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. This is the state (see FIG. 3). Further, when the first movable body 1600 is in the presentation position, most of the first movable body 1600 is exposed in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and is easily visible to the player.

In addition, the position of the second movable body 1700 in the state where the second transmission gear 1823 is fully rotated clockwise in the front view (the second movable body 1700 on the right side is rotated to the maximum clockwise in the front view, and the first movable body on the left side is rotated). The position where the second movable body 1700 is rotated counterclockwise to the maximum in the front view) (see FIGS. 54, 55, and 66) is referred to as the standby position of the second movable body 1700. Further, the position of the second movable body 1700 in the state where the second transmission gear 1823 is rotated counterclockwise to the maximum in the front view (the second movable body 1700 on the right side is rotated to the maximum counterclockwise in the front view, and the left side is moved to the left). The position where the second movable body 1700 is rotated to the maximum clockwise in the front view) (see FIGS. 67 to 70) is referred to as an effect position of the second movable body 1700.

When the second movable body 1700 is in the standby position, the entire second movable body 1700 is located behind the base member 1500, and thus is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Further, when the second movable body 1700 is in the effect position, the second movable body 1700 is located below the base member 1500 in its entirety, so that the second movable body 1700 is easily visible to the player.

The movement of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 by the movement control means 1800 (the standby position (see FIG. 55) and the effect position (see FIG. 68) of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700). Between the first movable body 1600 and the movable body 1620 provided on the first movable body 1600 (movement between the standby position (see FIG. 60) and the effect position (see FIG. 64) of the movable body 1620). Each can be done independently. That is, it is possible to move the movable body 1620 of the first movable body 1600 to the standby position or the production position regardless of which position (the standby position or the production position) the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are located. It is possible. 69 and 70, a state in which the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are in the rendering position and the movable body 1620 of the first movable body 1600 is in the rendering position is illustrated.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 59, the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are moved to the standby position, and the first movable body 1600 is stored immediately in front of the base member 1500 (on the front side). In addition, by housing the second movable body 1700 immediately behind (on the rear surface side) the base member 1500, the entire second movable accessory unit 82 can be formed compactly. Therefore, when the second movable accessory unit 82 is transported, the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are housed in the standby position, so that space can be saved during transportation. ..

When the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are in the standby position, the first movable body 1600 is in front of the base member 1500 (on the player side), and the second movable body 1700 is the base member 1500. They are arranged behind (inside the pachinko gaming machine 1). For this reason, the distance (front-back direction distance) between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be secured, and even if a shock is applied to the second movable accessory unit 82 during transportation or the like. The occurrence of contact between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be suppressed. Particularly in the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are in the standby position, the base member 1500 is arranged between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700. The occurrence of contact between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be suppressed more effectively.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 71, the first movable body 1600 is located in front of the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction even when the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are moved to the effect position. The second movable body 1700 is arranged rearward of the base member 1500. As described above, since the members (the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700) movable with respect to the base member 1500 are separately arranged before and after the base member 1500, the second movable accessory. The center of gravity of the entire unit 82 will be located in a portion close to the base member 1500 (inside the base member or in a portion close to the base member). Therefore, the moment of inertia generated when the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 operate (move) can be reduced, and the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 swing (vibrate, etc.). ) Can be suppressed. As a result, the occurrence of contact between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 are arranged substantially symmetrically with the first movable body 1600 sandwiched therebetween when seen from the front. Therefore, the center of gravity of the entire second movable accessory unit 82 is located in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the second movable accessory unit 82, and the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body can be moved more effectively. Swinging (vibration or the like) of the body 1700 can be suppressed.

Further, the motor 1631 of the first movable body 1600 is arranged at a position overlapping the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction (for example, in the opening 1510 of the base member 1500 when the first movable body 1600 is at the standby position). (See FIG. 59 etc.). Thus, by disposing the motor 1631, which is a relatively heavy member in the first movable body 1600, at a position overlapping the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction, the center of gravity of the entire second movable accessory unit 82 is set to the base. It becomes easy to position the member near the member 1500. This makes it possible to more effectively suppress swinging (vibration or the like) of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700.

[Holding of the first movable body 1600 by the movement control means 1800]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the movement control means 1800 for holding the first movable body 1600 at the standby position will be described in detail.

Since the first movable body 1600 is constantly subjected to its own weight (force to move downward), the movement control means 1800 causes the first movable body 1600 not to move unintentionally downward at a predetermined position (particularly In the present embodiment, it is configured so that it can be held at the standby position). 72 to 74, in order to facilitate understanding of the configuration for holding the first movable body 1600 in the standby position, a part of the movement control means 1800 (second transmission gear 1823 and arm 1824) and the first movable body A schematic view of a body 1600 is shown.

In the following description using FIGS. 72 to 74, in order to facilitate understanding of the rotation state (rotational position) of the second transmission gear 1823, the transmission shaft portion provided in the second transmission gear 1823. The description will be given focusing on the rotational position of the 1823a.

As shown in FIG. 72, when the first movable body 1600 is in the standby position, the second transmission gear 1823 is rotating clockwise in a front view to a predetermined position. The position of the transmission shaft portion 1823a at this time is referred to as a rotational position A. The rotation position A is a position on the upper right of the center (rotation axis) of the second transmission gear 1823 when seen from the front. In this state, the transmission shaft portion 1823a is in contact with one end (right end) of the first elongated hole 1824b of the arm 1824.

As shown in FIG. 73, when the second transmission gear 1823 rotates counterclockwise in a front view from the state where the first movable body 1600 is at the standby position (see FIG. 72), the transmission shaft portion 1823a reaches a certain rotation position. At this time, the center line of the first elongated hole 1824b (arm 1824) (the straight line connecting the central points in the width direction (shorter direction) of the first elongated hole 1824b) L is the rotation locus of the transmission shaft portion 1823a in a front view. It touches the circle R along. The position of the transmission shaft portion 1823a at this time is referred to as a rotational position B. In this state, the first movable body 1600 is located at a position higher than the standby position (the highest position in the movable range of the first movable body 1600).

As shown in FIG. 74, when the second transmission gear 1823 further rotates counterclockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. 73, the first movable body 1600 can be moved to the effect position. The position of the transmission shaft portion 1823a at this time is referred to as a rotational position C. The rotation position C is a position substantially below the center (rotation axis) of the second transmission gear 1823 in a front view.

When the transmission shaft portion 1823a is located in the range (angle range X) between the rotational position A and the rotational position B, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates clockwise in the front view, and thus the first movable state. Body 1600 will move downward. Further, when the transmission shaft portion 1823a is positioned in the angular range X, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front, so that the first movable body 1600 moves upward.

In the state where the transmission shaft portion 1823a is located in the range (angle range Y) between the rotational position B and the rotational position C, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates clockwise in the front view, so that the first movement is possible. Body 1600 will move upwards. Further, when the transmission shaft portion 1823a is positioned in the angular range Y, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front, so that the first movable body 1600 moves downward.

In the movement control unit 1800 configured as described above, a force that rotates counterclockwise in a front view is constantly applied to the arm 1824 by the weight of the first movable body 1600. As shown in FIG. 72, when the transmission shaft portion 1823a is positioned in the angular range X, when the arm 1824 tries to rotate counterclockwise in a front view, the second transmission gear 1823 is transferred to the second transmission gear 1823 via the transmission shaft portion 1823a. A force that rotates clockwise when viewed from the front is applied. However, when the first movable body 1600 is in the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 72), the transmission shaft portion 1823a is in contact with the right end of the first elongated hole 1824b of the arm 1824, so that the second transmission gear 1823 is It cannot rotate any more. That is, even if a force due to the weight of the first movable body 1600 is applied to the arm 1824, the arm 1824 and the second transmission gear 1823 do not rotate, and the first movable body 1600 is held at the standby position.

As described above, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates clockwise in the front view, and the transmission shaft portion 1823a and the right end of the first elongated hole 1824b at the position (rotation position A) beyond the rotation position B. By contacting with each other and setting the state to the standby position of the first movable body 1600, the first movable body 1600 can be held so as not to move downward due to its own weight. In this case, since the driving force of the motor 1810 is not required to hold the first movable body 1600, power is not wasted and the life of the motor 1810 is not unnecessarily shortened.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the gaming machine.
The first movable body 1600 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the first movable body.
The second movable body 1700 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the second movable body.
Further, the first movable body 1600 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the movable body.
Further, the motor 1810 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the driving means.
The second transmission gear 1823 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of a rotating body.
The arm 1824 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the conversion mechanism and the reciprocating motion transmission means.
Further, the first elongated hole 1824b according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the movement restriction means.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the single first movable body 1600 is attached to one surface side of the base member 1500 and the pair of second movable bodies 1700 is attached to the other surface side of the base member 1500. The number of (first movable body 1600 and second movable body 1700) is not limited to this. That is, it is possible to attach a plurality of first movable bodies 1600 to the base member 1500, or attach a single body or three or more second movable bodies 1700 to the base member 1500.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the second transmission gear 1823 beyond the angular range X in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front is restricted by the first elongated hole 1824b formed in the arm 1824 (FIG. 66), the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation of the second transmission gear 1823 may be restricted by other configurations. For example, the rotation of the second transmission gear 1823 can be regulated by separately providing a regulation member that can come into contact with the transmission shaft portion 1823a provided in the second transmission gear 1823.

[Wiring configuration]
Below, the structure regarding the wiring of the movable body (the movable body 1620 of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700) will be described.

The movable body 1620 and the second movable body 1700 of the first movable body 1600 each have a substrate (a substrate 1622 and a substrate 1720) on which LEDs are mounted, and it is necessary to supply power to the substrate via a wiring member. There is. However, when assembling the movable body 1620 or the second movable body 1700, the wiring member was not properly connected to the substrate, or the wiring member fell off from the substrate due to the movement of the movable body 1620 or the second movable body 1700. In this case, a problem occurs such that power cannot be supplied to the substrate. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a configuration for suppressing the occurrence of such a defect. The details will be described below.

First, the configuration relating to the wiring of the second movable body 1700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 80. 75 and 76, the light diffusing member 1730 and the cover member 1740 are not shown for convenience. Further, in FIG. 77, a flat cable 1770, which will be described later, is omitted for convenience. 77 and 78, the light diffusion member 1730 is not shown for convenience.

The second movable body 1700 includes a connector 1760 and a flat cable 1770 in addition to the base member 1710, the substrate 1720, the light diffusing member 1730, the cover member 1740 and the rotating shaft 1750 described above.

The connector 1760 shown in FIGS. 75 to 78 takes in electric power to the board 1720. The connector 1760 is provided on the upper right portion of the front surface of the substrate 1720. The connector 1760 is connected to the LED 1721 provided on the substrate 1720 and can supply power to the LED 1721. The connector 1760 is arranged such that a connecting portion into which a wiring member (a flat cable 1770 described later in this embodiment) can be inserted and fixed is directed substantially upward in a front view. The connector 1760 is connected to the flat cable 1770 by inserting the flat cable 1770 into the connection portion.

The flat cable 1770 shown in FIGS. 76 and 78 to 80 is a member that conducts electric power. The flat cable 1770 is formed in a sheet shape whose length in the width direction is shorter than its length in the longitudinal direction. The thickness of the flat cable 1770 is formed sufficiently smaller than its width. The flat cable 1770 has flexibility (flexible flat cable (FFC) is preferable). 80 shows only the vicinity of one end (the end on the side connected to the connector 1760) of the flat cable 1770, but the other end also has substantially the same configuration, so the other end Illustration of parts is omitted. The flat cable 1770 mainly includes a power line 1771, an insulator 1772, and a reinforcing sheet 1773.

The power supply line 1771 is a portion through which power is conducted. The power supply line 1771 is formed of a conductor. A plurality of power supply lines 1771 are arranged so as to be arranged substantially parallel to each other. The plurality of power supply lines 1771 include power supply lines 1771 to which different voltages are applied. As described above, the plurality of power supply lines 1771 can make power having a voltage according to the purpose conductive.

The insulator 1772 covers the power supply line 1771. The insulator 1772 is formed in a sheet shape that covers substantially the entire power supply line 1771. The insulator 1772 is formed so that one end of the power supply line 1771 is exposed from one side surface side.

The reinforcing sheet 1773 reinforces the end portion of the insulator 1772. The reinforcing sheet 1773 is provided on the other side surface side of one end of the insulator 1772 (the side opposite to the side where the power supply line 1771 is exposed). The reinforcing sheet 1773 is formed to have a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the other side surface side of the insulator 1772. The reinforcing sheet 1773 is colored differently from the insulator 1772. This makes it easier to distinguish the reinforcing sheet 1773 and the insulator 1772.

The base member 1710 of the second movable body 1700 shown in FIGS. 75 to 79 includes an outer edge portion 1713 and a guide portion 1714 in addition to the cylindrical portion 1711 and the long hole 1712 described above.

The outer edge portion 1713 is a portion formed (standing) to extend forward from the base member 1710. The outer edge portion 1713 is formed substantially along the outer shape of the base member 1710. A concave portion 1713a is formed in the outer edge portion 1713.

The recessed portion 1713a is a portion formed by recessing the front end surface of the outer edge portion 1713 toward the rear. The recess 1713a is formed in the upper right portion of the outer edge portion 1713. More specifically, the recess 1713a is formed in a portion facing the upper end surface (connecting portion) of the connector 1760 in a front view. The recess 1713a is formed to have a linear shape along the outer edge portion 1713 when viewed from the front. The recess 1713a is formed to have a length substantially the same as the width of the flat cable 1770. The recess 1713a is formed so as to have a substantially arc shape in a sectional view (see FIGS. 77 to 79).

The guide portion 1714 guides the flat cable 1770 so as to follow a normal wiring route. The guide portion 1714 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. A pair of guide portions 1714 are provided on the upper right portion of the base member 1710 so as to face each other. The pair of guide portions 1714 are arranged so as to sandwich the concave portion 1713a therebetween. The interval between the pair of guide portions 1714 is formed to be substantially the same as the width of the flat cable 1770. The guide portion 1714 is arranged so as to extend from the outer edge portion 1713 toward the inside of the base member 1710 (connector 1760) when viewed from the front. The width (height) in the front-rear direction of the guide portion 1714 is formed to be larger than the width in the front-rear direction of the outer edge portion 1713 adjacent to the guide portion 1714. That is, the front end portion of the guide portion 1714 projects further forward than the front end portion of the outer edge portion 1713.

The substrate 1720 includes a guide line 1722 in addition to the LED 1721 described above.

The reference line 1722 shown in FIGS. 75 to 77 is a reference for the position of the flat cable 1770. The reference line 1722 is formed by performing appropriate printing on the front surface of the substrate 1720. The reference line 1722 is formed on the front surface of the substrate 1720 and substantially above the connector 1760. The reference line 1722 is formed in a straight line parallel to the upper end surface (connecting portion) of the connector 1760.

The cover member 1740 of the second movable body 1700 shown in FIGS. 77 to 79 has an outer edge portion 1741.

The outer edge portion 1741 is a portion formed (standing up) so as to extend rearward from the cover member 1740. The outer edge portion 1741 is formed substantially along the outer shape of the cover member 1740. A convex portion 1741a is formed on the outer edge portion 1741.

The convex portion 1741a is a portion formed by projecting the rear end surface of the outer edge portion 1741 rearward. The convex portion 1741a is formed on the upper right portion of the outer edge portion 1741. More specifically, the convex portion 1741a is formed in a portion facing the concave portion 1713a formed in the base member 1710 in the front-rear direction. Like the recess 1713a, the protrusion 1741a is formed to have a length substantially the same as the width of the flat cable 1770. The convex portion 1741a is formed so as to have a substantially arc shape in a sectional view (see FIGS. 77 to 79).

Here, the concave portion 1713a and the convex portion 1741a are formed so as to have curved surfaces of different shapes in a cross-sectional view (see FIG. 79). Specifically, the convex portion 1741a is formed in a shape that can be engaged with the concave portion 1713a (can enter into the concave portion 1713a) when the cover member 1740 is fixed to the base member 1710. Further, when the cover member 1740 is fixed to the base member 1710, the convex portion 1741a comes closest to the concave portion 1713a at two locations (portion D and portion E in FIG. 79) when viewed in cross section (in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment). Abutting). The D portion is a portion inside the tip of the convex portion 1741a in the thickness direction of the outer edge portion 1741 (left-right direction on the paper surface in FIG. 79). Further, the E portion is a portion outside the tip of the convex portion 1741a in the thickness direction of the outer edge portion 1741.

Hereinafter, a method of assembling the second movable body 1700, particularly a method of accurately connecting the flat cable 1770 to the connector 1760 will be described.

When inserting the flat cable 1770 into the connector 1760 for connection, check whether the flat cable 1770 is correctly connected to the connector 1760 by referring to the reinforcing sheet 1773 of the flat cable 1770 and the reference line 1722 of the substrate 1720. be able to.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81, in a state where the flat cable 1770 is accurately connected to the connector 1760 in advance, the end portion of the reinforcing sheet 1773 of the flat cable 1770 matches the reference line 1722 in a front view (overlap). The print position of the reference line 1722 is adjusted so that Therefore, the worker can perform the work accurately by attaching the flat cable 1770 to the connector 1760 so that the end portion of the reinforcing sheet 1773 coincides with the reference line 1722.

If the flat cable 1770 is connected to the connector 1760 in an inclined state, the end portion of the reinforcing sheet 1773 does not coincide with the reference line 1722 as shown in FIG. It turns out that the connection is incorrect.

Further, when the flat cable 1770 is accurately connected to the connector 1760, the flat cable 1770 is arranged so as to extend from the connector 1760 toward the guide portion 1714. The flat cable 1770 is guided by the pair of guide portions 1714. Specifically, the flat cable 1770 is arranged so as to be sandwiched by the guide portions 1714 from both sides in the width direction. Therefore, even if the flat cable 1770 tries to move in the width direction, one of the pair of guide portions 1714 contacts the flat cable 1770, and the movement of the flat cable 1770 in the width direction is restricted. In this way, the guide portion 1714 guides the flat cable 1770 so as to follow a normal wiring path.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the second movable body 1700 moves (rotates) around the rotation shaft 1750 extending in the front-rear direction. That is, the second movable body 1700 moves on a plane parallel to the surface of the flat cable 1770. Therefore, a force along the direction parallel to the surface of the flat cable 1770 (for example, the width direction) is easily applied to the flat cable 1770. However, in this embodiment, by disposing the guide portions 1714 on both sides of the flat cable 1770 in the width direction, the movement of the flat cable 1770 in the width direction can be effectively restricted.

Further, the direction in which the pair of guide portions 1714 guide the flat cable 1770 is formed so as to be the same as the direction in which the flat cable 1770 is accurately inserted into the connector 1760. That is, the connection portion of the connector 1760 is arranged on an extension line in the direction in which the pair of guide portions 1714 extend in a front view. Therefore, if the flat cable 1770 is connected to the connector 1760 in a tilted state, the flat cable 1770 interferes with the guide portion 1714 as shown in FIG. It turns out that the connection is incorrect.

The flat cable 1770 may be inserted into the connector 1760 after fixing the board 1720 to the base member 1710, or may be inserted into the connector 1760 before fixing the board 1720 to the base member 1710. When the flat cable 1770 is inserted into the connector 1760 after the board 1720 is fixed to the base member 1710, the flat cable 1770 interferes with the guide portion 1714 unless the flat cable 1770 is inserted accurately (so as not to tilt). It can be seen that the connection of the flat cable 1770 is incorrect. When the flat cable 1770 is inserted into the connector 1760 before the board 1720 is fixed to the base member 1710, the flat cable 1770 is fixed when the board 1720 is fixed to the base member 1710 unless the flat cable 1770 is correctly inserted. At first glance, it can be seen that the connection of the flat cable 1770 is incorrect because it interferes with the guide portion 1714.

Further, after the flat cable 1770 is correctly inserted into the connector 1760, the cover member 1740 is fixed to the base member 1710 from the front as shown in FIGS. 77 to 79. Specifically, the outer edge portion 1713 of the base member 1710 and the outer edge portion 1741 of the cover member 1740 are abutted against each other and fixed in a state of abutting each other. In this way, the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740 form a box-shaped member. In the space formed inside the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740, the substrate 1720, the connector 1760, and the vicinity of the tip end portion (end portion on the connector 1760 side) of the flat cable 1770 are accommodated.

Here, when the cover member 1740 is fixed to the base member 1710, as shown in FIG. 79, by a predetermined butting portion (specifically, the convex portion 1741a of the cover member 1740 and the concave portion 1713a of the base member 1710). The flat cable 1770 is sandwiched and fixed. Here, the convex portion 1741a and the concave portion 1713a are formed in a substantially arc shape. Therefore, the flat cable 1770 is sandwiched between the convex portion 1741a and the concave portion 1713a while being bent along the convex portion 1741a and the concave portion 1713a.

By sandwiching and fixing the bent portion of the flat cable 1770 in this manner, the flat cable 1770 can be firmly held to the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740. Thereby, even if the second movable body 1700 moves, the flat cable 1770 can be prevented from moving with respect to the base member 1710, and thus the flat cable 1770 can be prevented from falling out of the connector 1760. ..

Particularly, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, the flat cable 1770 can be held at two places (portion D and portion E). Therefore, the flat cable 1770 can be more firmly held as compared with the case where the flat cable 1770 is held at one place. In addition, since the portions (convex portion 1741a and concave portion 1713a) that sandwich the flat cable 1770 are formed in a curved surface, it is difficult for an excessive load to be applied to the flat cable 1770, and the flat cable 1770 is damaged or broken in the portion. Can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the shape of the butting portion (the convex portion 1741a of the cover member 1740 and the concave portion 1713a of the base member 1710) for holding the flat cable 1770 is not limited to that shown in FIG. Below, the modification of the said butt|matching part is demonstrated using FIG.

In the modified example (first modified example) shown in FIG. 83A, the cover member 1740 is formed with a convex portion 1741b, and the base member 1710 is formed with a concave portion 1713b. The convex portion 1741b of the cover member 1740 is formed to have a substantially trapezoidal shape (isopodal trapezoidal shape) in a cross-sectional view. The concave portion 1713b of the base member 1710 is formed to have the same shape (substantially trapezoidal shape) as the convex portion 1741b in a sectional view.

In the abutting portion (the convex portion 1741b of the cover member 1740 and the concave portion 1713b of the base member 1710) configured in this way, the flat cable 1770 can be sandwiched between substantially the entire convex portion 1741b and the concave portion 1713b. Thereby, the flat cable 1770 can be firmly fixed.

In the modified example (second modified example) shown in FIG. 83B, the cover member 1740 is formed with a convex portion 1741c, and the base member 1710 is formed with a concave portion 1713c. The convex portion 1741c of the cover member 1740 is formed to have a substantially trapezoidal shape (isopodal trapezoidal shape) in a cross-sectional view. The recess 1713c of the base member 1710 is formed to have a substantially trapezoidal shape (isopodal trapezoidal shape) in a cross-sectional view. The trapezoidal leg of the convex portion 1741c and the trapezoidal leg of the concave portion 1713c (legs facing each other) are formed to be parallel to each other. The bottom side of the trapezoid of the recess 1713c (the bottom side of the recess 1713c) is formed to be shorter than the bottom side of the trapezoid of the protrusion 1741c (the side of the tip of the protrusion 1741c).

In the abutting portion (the convex portion 1741c of the cover member 1740 and the concave portion 1713c of the base member 1710) thus configured, the flat cable 1770 should be held by the inclined surfaces (trapezoidal legs) of the convex portion 1741c and the concave portion 1713c. You can At this time, a gap is formed between the tip of the protrusion 1741c and the bottom of the recess 1713c. Therefore, the flat cable 1770 can be gently bent in the gap.

In such a second modified example, an excessive load is less likely to be applied to the flat cable 1770 due to the corners (the trapezoidal apex portions) of the convex portions 1741c and the concave portions 1713c, and the flat cable 1770 is prevented from being damaged or broken. be able to.

In the modified example (third modified example) shown in FIG. 83(c), the cover member 1740 is provided with an uneven portion 1741d, and the base member 1710 is provided with an uneven portion 1713d. The concavo-convex portion 1741d of the cover member 1740 is formed to have a wavy shape in a cross-sectional view. The uneven portion 1713d of the base member 1710 is formed so as to have the same shape (corrugation) as the uneven portion 1741d of the cover member 1740 in a cross-sectional view.

In the abutting portion (the uneven portion 1741d of the cover member 1740 and the uneven portion 1713d of the base member 1710) configured in this way, the flat cable 1770 can be sandwiched by substantially the entire surface of the uneven portion 1741d and the uneven portion 1713d. Thereby, the flat cable 1770 can be firmly fixed. Further, since the uneven portion 1741d and the uneven portion 1713d are formed in a curved surface having no corners, it is difficult to apply an excessive load to the flat cable 1770, and it is possible to suppress damage or breakage of the flat cable 1770. ..

Next, the configuration relating to the wiring of the movable body 1620 of the first movable body 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86.

The movable body 1620 includes a connector 1626 and a flat cable 1627 in addition to the base member 1621, the substrate 1622, the light diffusion member 1623, the cover member 1624, and the rotating shaft 1625 described above.

The connector 1626 shown in FIGS. 85 and 86 takes in electric power to the substrate 1622. The connector 1626 is provided on the upper left portion of the rear surface of the substrate 1622. The connector 1626 is connected to the LED 1622a provided on the substrate 1622 and can supply power to the LED 1622a. The connector 1626 is arranged such that a connecting portion into which a wiring member (a flat cable 1627 to be described later in the present embodiment) can be inserted and fixed is directed to the upper left in rear view. The connector 1626 is connected to the flat cable 1627 by inserting the flat cable 1627 into the connection portion.

The flat cable 1627 shown in FIG. 85 is a member that conducts electric power. The flat cable 1627, like the flat cable 1770 of the second movable body 1700, includes a power supply line (not shown), an insulator 1627b, and a reinforcing sheet 1627c. The flat cable 1627 has substantially the same configuration as the flat cable 1770 of the second movable body 1700, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The substrate 1622 of the movable body 1620 shown in FIGS. 84 to 86 has a guide line 1622b in addition to the above-described LED 1622a.

The reference line 1622b is a reference for the position of the flat cable 1627. The reference line 1622b is formed by performing appropriate printing on the rear surface of the substrate 1622. The reference line 1622b is formed on the rear surface of the substrate 1622 approximately in the upper left of the connector 1626. The reference line 1622b is formed in a straight line parallel to the upper left end face (connecting portion) of the connector 1626.

The base member 1621 of the movable body 1620 shown in FIGS. 84 and 86 has an opening 1621c in addition to the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 1621a and elongated hole 1621b.

The opening 1621c shown in FIG. 86 is a portion formed so as to penetrate the base member 1621 in the front-rear direction. The opening 1621c is formed in the upper left portion of the base member 1621. Specifically, the opening 1621c is formed at a position facing the connector 1626 and the reference line 1622b provided on the substrate 1622 when the substrate 1622 is attached to the base member 1621. The opening 1621c is formed in a size and shape such that the connector 1626 and the reference line 1622b can be sufficiently visually recognized from the rear through the opening 1621c. In the present embodiment, the opening 1621c is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is slightly larger than the connector 1626 in rear view.

Hereinafter, a method of assembling the movable body 1620, particularly a method of accurately connecting the flat cable 1627 to the connector 1626 will be described.

When the flat cable 1627 is inserted and connected to the connector 1626, as shown in FIG. 85, the flat cable 1627 is accurately connected to the connector 1626 by referring to the reinforcing sheet 1627c of the flat cable 1627 and the reference line 1622b of the substrate 1622. You can check if it is connected.

Further, after the flat cable 1627 is correctly inserted into the connector 1626, the substrate 1622 is fixed to the base member 1621 as shown in FIGS. 84 and 86. In this state, the connector 1626 is arranged so as to face the opening 1621c of the base member 1621. Accordingly, the portion where the flat cable 1627 is inserted into the connector 1626 can be confirmed from the rear of the base member 1621 through the opening 1621c. Therefore, after the board 1622 is fixed to the base member 1621, it can be easily confirmed whether or not the flat cable 1627 is correctly inserted into the connector 1626.

In the above description, the movable body 1620 is provided with the opening portion 1621c so that the flat cable 1627 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 86). However, similarly, the second movable body 1700 has an opening portion (an opening to be described later). It is also possible to provide part 1715). Hereinafter, the second movable body 1700 having the opening 1715 (a modified example of the second movable body 1700) will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

In the modification of the second movable body 1700 shown in FIG. 87, the connector 1760 and the reference line 1722 are provided in the upper right portion of the rear surface of the substrate 1720.

Further, in the modified example of the second movable body 1700, the opening 1715 is formed in the base member 1710. The opening 1715 is a portion formed so as to penetrate the base member 1710 in the front-rear direction. The opening 1715 is formed in the upper right portion of the base member 1710. Specifically, the opening 1715 is formed at a position facing the connector 1760, the guide line 1722, and the guide portion 1714 provided on the board 1720 when the board 1720 is attached to the base member 1710. The opening 1715 is formed in a size and shape such that the connector 1760, the reference line 1722, and the guide portion 1714 can be sufficiently visually recognized from the rear through the opening 1715. In the present embodiment, the opening 1715 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is slightly larger than the connector 1760 in rear view.

In the second movable body 1700 configured in this way, the flat cable 1770 is guided by the portion inserted into the connector 1760 and the guide portion 1714 from the rear of the base member 1710 through the opening 1715. You can check. Therefore, even after the substrate 1720, the cover member 1740, and the like are fixed to the base member 1710, it is determined whether the flat cable 1770 is correctly inserted into the connector 1760, and whether the flat cable 1770 follows a normal wiring path. It can be easily confirmed.

In addition, in FIG. 87, a modified example in which the opening 1715 is applied to the second movable body 1700 is shown. However, in addition to this, the movable body 1620 is provided with a guide portion (guide portion) like the second movable body 1700. 1714) (see FIG. 81) or a butting portion (convex portion 1741a and concave portion 1713a) (see FIG. 79) can be provided.

The LED 1721 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of an electronic component.
The base member 1710 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the direction defining means.
The base member 1710 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the first member.
The cover member 1740 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the second member.
The flat cable 1770 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the wiring member.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, power is supplied to the LED 1721 by the flat cable 1770, but the present invention is not limited to this, and power may be supplied to other electronic components. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the guide portion 1714 is provided on the base member 1710, but it may be provided on other members (for example, the cover member 1740 and the like).

Further, the flat cable 1770 need not always be in contact with the guide portion 1714. For example, normally (in a state where the second movable body 1700 does not move), it may be arranged so as to pass between the pair of guide portions 1714 without contacting the pair of guide portions 1714. Even with such a configuration, when the flat cable 1770 tries to move in the width direction, it comes into contact with either one of the pair of guide portions 1714, and the movement of the flat cable 1770 can be restricted. it can.

Further, in the present embodiment, some shapes of the butting portions sandwiching the flat cable 1770 are illustrated (see FIGS. 79 and 83), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the flat cable 1770 is bent. Any shape can be used as long as it can be fixed.

Further, in this embodiment (for example, the second movable body 1700 shown in FIG. 87), the connector 1760 and the flat cable 1627 provided on the rear surface of the substrate 1720 are arranged behind the substrate 1720 in order to be visible. Although the base member 1710 is provided with the opening 1715, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the connector 1760 is provided on the front surface of the substrate 1720, the light diffusing member 1730 and the cover member 1740 arranged in front of the substrate 1720 are appropriately provided with openings so that the connector 1760 and the like can be viewed from the front. It is also possible to

Further, in the present embodiment, the reference lines 1622b and 1722, which serve as a reference for the positions of the flat cable 1627 and the flat cable 1770, are formed by performing appropriate printing on the substrates 1622 and 1720. For example, instead of printing, a standard member may be attached to the substrates 1622 and 1720.

Further, although the flat cable 1770 is illustrated as the wiring member in the present embodiment, various other wiring members can be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a pachislot gaming machine, for example.

The configuration of the effect device 2400 according to the first embodiment of the first movable accessory unit will be described in detail below.

88 is a device for giving a visual impression (impact) to the player by rotating a drum-shaped accessory (a drum body 2420 described later). As shown in FIGS. 88 to 90, the rendering device 2400 includes a mounting base 2410, a drum body 2420, a light emitting unit 2430, and a drive transmission mechanism 2440.

The mounting base 2410 supports a drum body 2420 and the like described later. The mounting base 2410 includes a housing member 2411, a right side receiving member 2412, a left side receiving member 2413, and a shaft member 2414.

The housing member 2411 is for housing the drum body 2420 and the like. The accommodating member 2411 is formed in a bottomed substantially cylindrical shape with its axial direction directed in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the housing member 2411 is disposed on the right side, and the left portion and the front portion thereof are open. The housing member 2411 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42 via the decorative member of the rendering device 2400.

The right side receiving member 2412 is for supporting the right end portion of the drum body 2420. The right side receiving member 2412 is formed in a substantially disc shape. The right side receiving member 2412 is formed such that the outer diameter of the right side receiving member 2412 can be housed in the housing member 2411. The right side receiving member 2412 is fixed to the bottom surface (right end portion) of the housing member 2411 with a screw and housed in the housing member 2411.

The left side receiving member 2413 is for supporting the left end portion of the drum body 2420. The left side receiving member 2413 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface oriented in the left-right direction. The left side receiving member 2413 is formed such that the width in the front-rear direction thereof is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the accommodation member 2411. Further, the left side receiving member 2413 is formed such that its vertical width is wider than the vertical width of the housing member 2411. The lower part of the right side surface of the left side receiving member 2413 is recessed leftward except for a part thereof. The lower part of the left side receiving member 2413 is fixed to the left end portion of the housing member 2411 with a screw. The left side receiving member 2413 includes an outer protruding portion 2413a and an inner protruding portion 2413b.

The outer protruding portion 2413a is formed on the lower portion (recessed portion) of the right side surface of the left receiving member 2413. The outer protruding portion 2413a projects rightward from the right side surface of the left receiving member 2413. The outer protruding portion 2413a is formed in a substantially annular shape in a side view.

The inner protrusion 2413b protrudes rightward from the center of the outer protrusion 2413a. The inner protruding portion 2413b is formed in a substantially annular shape in a side view. The inner edge of the inner protruding portion 2413b is formed into a substantially hexagonal shape in a side view.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the shaft member 2414 is a substantially hexagonal columnar member whose axial direction is directed in the left-right direction. The left end portion of the shaft member 2414 is supported by the inner protruding portion 2413b. The right end portion of the shaft member 2414 is supported by the bottom surface of the housing member 2411 and the right side receiving member 2412. The shaft member 2414 supports a light emitting unit 2430, which will be described later, via a connecting member 2414a attached to the left and right midway portions thereof.

The drum body 2420 is a member for rotating the design C. As shown in FIGS. 91 to 93, the drum main body 2420 includes a base member 2421, a reel seat 2422, a left side mounting member 2423, and a right side mounting member 2424.

The base member 2421 is for accommodating a reel sheet 2422 described later. The base member 2421 is formed in the shape of a hollow truncated cone whose axial direction is directed in the left-right direction. The base member 2421 is formed such that its outer diameter and inner diameter gradually decrease from the right end toward the left end. The base member 2421 is formed such that the outer diameter of the right end portion of the base member 2421 can be accommodated in the accommodation member 2411 (see FIG. 88). The left part of the base member 2421 is closed and the right part is open. The base member 2421 is made of a transparent resin material and is configured to be visible inside. As shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, the base member 2421 includes a first protrusion 2421a, a second protrusion 2421b, a third protrusion 2421c, a through hole 2421d, and an engaging hole 2421e.

The first projecting portion 2421a projects radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the base member 2421. The first projecting portion 2421a is arranged at the left end portion of the base member 2421 and is formed so as to be continuous with the bottom surface of the base member 2421. Thus, the first protrusion 2421a is formed so as to protrude rightward from the bottom surface of the base member 2421. The first protrusion 2421a is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a side view. The first protrusion 2421a is formed at the rear end of the bottom surface of the base member 2421 (the position at 3 o'clock in FIG. 94).

The second protrusion 2421b is formed to have substantially the same shape as the first protrusion 2421a. The second protrusion 2421b is arranged at a distance from the first protrusion 2421a in the circumferential direction of the base member 2421. The second protrusion 2421b is formed on the front upper part of the bottom surface of the base member 2421 (a position between 10 o'clock and 11 o'clock of the timepiece in FIG. 94).

The third protrusion 2421c is formed so as to be vertically symmetrical with respect to the second protrusion 2421b with respect to the center of the base member 2421 in the vertical direction. The third protrusion 2421c is formed on the lower front portion of the bottom surface of the base member 2421 (a position between 7 o'clock and 8 o'clock in the timepiece in FIG. 94).

The through hole 2421d is a hole formed in the bottom surface of the base member 2421 and having a substantially circular shape in a side view. The through hole 2421d has an inner diameter that allows the shaft member 2414 to be inserted therethrough. The through hole 2421d penetrates the center of the bottom surface of the base member 2421 in the left-right direction.

The engagement hole 2421e is a substantially rectangular hole formed at the right end of the base member 2421. The engagement hole 2421e radially penetrates the base member 2421 from the outer peripheral surface to the inner peripheral surface. The plurality of engagement holes 2421e (three in the present embodiment) are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction.

As shown in FIG. 88, the base member 2421 configured in this manner is attached to the housing member 2411 via a left-side attachment member 2423 described later and the like. As a result, the base member 2421 is housed in the housing member 2411 and is visible to the player from the front. Further, as shown in FIG. 89, the shaft member 2414 is inserted into the through hole 2421d of the base member 2421. The base member 2421 is provided on the mounting base 2410 so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft member 2414.

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the reel sheet 2422 is a member having a pattern C printed on the outer peripheral surface. The pattern C enhances the interest of the player by making the player visually recognize or not at the time of game production. In this embodiment, as the design C, a plurality of designs such as a numerical design "111" and a character design "HIT" are adopted. Further, the design C is omitted as appropriate in the drawings except the exploded perspective views (FIGS. 92, 93 and 98) in order to make other members easy to see.
The reel sheet 2422 is formed by rolling a sheet-shaped member. The reel seat 2422 is formed such that the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the base member 2421. The reel seat 2422 is formed such that its width in the left-right direction is shorter than the width in the left-right direction of the base member 2421. Of the outer peripheral surface of the reel sheet 2422, a light-transmitting paint is applied to a portion corresponding to the design C, and a light-impermeable (light-shielding) paint is applied to the other portions. As a result, the reel sheet 2422 is configured to be able to transmit light in the portion where the design C is printed, and is configured to be incapable of transmitting light in the portion where the design C is not printed. As shown in FIGS. 93 and 95, the reel sheet 2422 includes a first cutout portion 2422a, a second cutout portion 2422b, a third cutout portion 2422c, and an overlapping portion 2422d.

The first cutout portion 2422a is formed at the left rear end portion of the reel seat 2422. The first cutout portion 2422a is formed in a substantially arc shape. The first cutout 2422a corresponds to the first protrusion 2421a of the base member 2421. That is, the first cutout 2422a is configured to be engageable with the first protrusion 2421a.

The second cutout portion 2422b is formed to have substantially the same shape as the first cutout portion 2422a. The second cutouts 2422b are arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction of the reel sheet 2422 with respect to the first cutouts 2422a. The second cutout portion 2422b is formed in the front upper portion of the left end portion of the reel sheet 2422. The second cutout 2422b corresponds to the second protrusion 2421b. That is, the second cutout 2422b is configured to be engageable with the second protrusion 2421b.

The third cutout portion 2422c is formed so as to be vertically symmetrical with respect to the second cutout portion 2422b with respect to the vertical center portion of the reel sheet 2422. The third cutout portion 2422c is formed in the lower front portion of the left end portion of the reel sheet 2422. The third notch 2422c corresponds to the third protrusion 2421c. That is, the third cutout 2422c is configured to be engageable with the third protrusion 2421c.

The distance L1a in the clockwise direction in FIG. 95 from the first notch 2422a to the second notch 2422b is the clockwise direction in FIG. 95 from the second notch 2422b to the third notch 2422c. Is formed to be longer than the distance L2a.

The overlapping portion 2422d is a portion (one end portion and the other end portion in the circumferential direction) where the reel sheets 2422 overlap in the radial direction. The overlapping portion 2422d is formed from the left end portion to the right end portion of the reel sheet 2422. The overlapping portion 2422d is formed in a portion where the pattern C is not printed. Further, the overlapping portion 2422d is formed in a portion where the first cutout portion 2422a, the second cutout portion 2422b, and the third cutout portion 2422c are not formed. The overlapping portion 2422d according to the present embodiment is formed on the rear upper portion of the reel sheet 2422.

The reel sheet 2422 configured as described above is housed in the base member 2421 as shown in FIGS. 93 and 96. At this time, the first cutout portion 2422a engages with the first protrusion 2421a. Further, the second cutout portion 2422b engages with the second protrusion portion 2421b. Further, the third cutout portion 2422c engages with the third protruding portion 2421c. As described above, the reel sheet 2422 is configured such that the symbol C is arranged at a specific position of the base member 2421 and is rotatable integrally with the base member 2421. Further, the symbol C of the reel sheet 2422 is visible from the outside of the base member 2421 when the reel sheet 2422 is accommodated in the base member 2421.

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the left side mounting member 2423 is an external gear for rotating the base member 2421. The left mounting member 2423 includes a recess 2423a and a through hole 2423b.

The recess 2423a is a substantially circular recess in a side view, which is formed on the left side surface of the left mounting member 2423. The recess 2423a is formed so as to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the outer protruding portion 2413a of the left receiving member 2413 (see FIG. 97).

The through hole 2423b is a hole that penetrates the center of the left side attachment member 2423 in the left-right direction. The through hole 2423b is formed in a substantially circular shape in a side view and has an inner diameter that allows the shaft member 2414 to be inserted therethrough.

The left mounting member 2423 thus configured is fixed to the bottom surface (left end portion) of the base member 2421 with a screw. Accordingly, the left mounting member 2423 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 2421. Further, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 97, the left side mounting member 2423 is supported by the left side receiving member 2413 so as to be relatively rotatable by fitting the recess 2423a into the outer protruding portion 2413a of the left side receiving member 2413. Further, the shaft member 2414 is inserted into the through hole 2423b of the left side mounting member 2423. As a result, the left mounting member 2423 is provided on the mounting base 2410 so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft member 2414.

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the right side attachment member 2424 is a substantially annular member attached to the right end portion of the base member 2421. The right mounting member 2424 is formed such that the outer diameter of the left end portion thereof is smaller than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 2421. The right mounting member 2424 includes a flange portion 2424a and a claw portion 2424b.

The flange portion 2424a is formed on the right and left midway portions of the right mounting member 2424. The flange portion 2424a is formed such that the outer diameter thereof is larger than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 2421 and smaller than the outer diameter of the right end portion of the base member 2421.

The claw portion 2424b is formed at the left end portion of the right mounting member 2424. The tip portion of the claw portion 2424b projects radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the right side mounting member 2424. A plurality of claw portions 2424b are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction. More specifically, the three claw portions 2424b are formed at substantially the same intervals as the circumferential intervals of the engagement holes 2421e of the base member 2421.

The right mounting member 2424 configured in this manner has its left end inserted into the right end of the base member 2421, and the tip end of the claw 2424b engages with the engagement hole 2421e of the base member 2421. Accordingly, the right side mounting member 2424 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 2421. Further, as shown in FIG. 89, the right side mounting member 2424 is supported by the right side receiving member 2412 so as to be relatively rotatable by fitting the right end portion thereof into the recess formed in the right side receiving member 2412.

The light emitting unit 2430 is for radiating light in the forward direction. The light emitting unit 2430 is housed in the drum body 2420. The light emitting unit 2430 includes a substrate 2431 and LEDs 2432.

The substrate 2431 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape and is arranged with its plate surface facing the front-rear direction. The substrate 2431 is arranged inside the reel sheet 2422. The substrate 2431 is disposed behind the shaft member 2414 and is fixed to the shaft member 2414 via the connecting member 2414a. As a result, the substrate 2431 is held by the mounting base 2410 with the plate surface thereof oriented in the front-rear direction even when the drum body 2420 rotates (it is configured so as not to rotate integrally with the drum body 2420). ).

The LEDs 2432 are disposed on the lower left portion, the upper portion (upper portion in the left and right central portion), and the lower right portion of the substrate 2431. The LED 2432 is configured to be able to emit light in the forward direction by being turned on.

The drive transmission mechanism 2440 is for transmitting a driving force to the drum body 2420. As shown in FIGS. 89 and 97, the drive transmission mechanism 2440 is provided on the left side receiving member 2413. The drive transmission mechanism 2440 includes a motor 2441, an upper gear 2442 and a lower gear 2443.

The motor 2441 is supported on the left side receiving member 2413. The motor 2441 is arranged above the housing member 2411. The rotation shaft 2441a of the motor 2441 is formed so as to extend leftward from the main body of the motor 2441.

The upper gear 2442 is an external gear fixed to the rotating shaft 2441a of the motor 2441 via the bush 2442a. The upper gear 2442 is arranged above the left mounting member 2423.

The lower gear 2443 is an external gear rotatably supported by the left receiving member 2413. The lower gear 2443 is disposed between the upper gear 2442 and the left mounting member 2423 and meshes with the upper gear 2442 and the left mounting member 2423, respectively.

Next, an operation mode of rendering device 2400 will be described. As an example of the operation mode of the rendering device 2400, from a state in which the player cannot see the pattern C (a state in which the symbol C does not face forward) to a state in which the player can see the symbol C (state in which the symbol C faces forward). An operation mode in the case of changing the state will be described.

First, rendering device 2400 turns on LED 2432 and drives motor 2441. As a result, the power of the motor 2441 is transmitted in the order of the rotating shaft 2441a, the upper gear 2442, the lower gear 2443, and the left side mounting member 2423, and the left side mounting member 2423 rotates in the circumferential direction about the axis thereof. As a result, the drum body 2420 rotates relative to the mounting base 2410 and the light emitting unit 2430.

Then, production device 2400 stops motor 2441. As a result, the rendering device 2400 causes the predetermined pattern C (for example, “111” shown in FIG. 92) printed on the reel sheet 2422 to be arranged at the front end portion. As a result, the effect device 2400 causes the player to display the predetermined symbol C and causes the light from the LED 2432 to pass from the reel sheet 2422. In this way, the production device 2400 gives the player the impression that the predetermined pattern C is emitting light.

As shown in FIG. 96, the drum main body 2420 according to the present embodiment includes a first cutout portion 2422a to a third cutout portion 2422c and a first protruding portion 2421a to a third protruding portion 2421c, respectively. Engaged. According to this, it is possible to prevent the reel sheet 2422 from rotating relative to the base member 2421. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the symbol C displayed to the player from being displaced due to the relative rotation of the reel sheet 2422.

Further, according to the drum body 2420 of the present embodiment, the relative rotation of the reel sheet 2422 can be prevented without using the double-sided tape, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, the assembling work of the drum body 2420 will be described.

First, the left side mounting member 2423 is brought into contact with the base member 2421 shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, and the base member 2421 and the left side mounting member 2423 are fixed by screws.

Next, the reel sheet 2422 is rolled and accommodated in the base member 2421. At this time, the reel sheet 2422 is rolled so that the end portions in the circumferential direction of the reel sheet 2422 overlap in the radial direction. As a result, the overlapping portion 2422d is formed. Then, the reel sheet 2422 is inserted into the base member 2421 so that the first cutout portion 2422a to the third cutout portion 2422c and the first projection portion 2421a to the third projection portion 2421c are engaged with each other. (See FIG. 96). As a result, the reel seat 2422 is attached to the base member 2421. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first cutout portion 2422a to the third cutout portion 2422c are used as a guide for the attachment position to the base member 2421.

After that, the left end portion of the right mounting member 2424 is inserted into the right end portion of the base member 2421, and the claw portion 2424b of the right mounting member 2424 is engaged with the engaging hole 2421e of the base member 2421. By the above, the assembling work of the drum body 2420 is completed.

The reel sheet 2422 according to the present embodiment can determine (position) the circumferential position with respect to the base member 2421 with reference to the plurality of cutout portions 2422a to 2422c. According to this, as compared with the case where the reel sheet 2422 is positioned with only one notch, the positioning can be performed with higher accuracy.

Here, if the plurality of cutout portions 2422a to 2422c (and the plurality of projection portions 2421a to 2421c) are arranged at the same intervals in the circumferential direction, the design C identifies the base member 2421 during assembly. There is a case that the position is shifted in the circumferential direction (rotational direction). Specifically, when the first cutout 2422a is engaged with the second protrusion 2421b, the second cutout 2422b is engaged with the third protrusion 2421c and the third cutout 2422c is moved to the first protrusion 2421c. The first protrusion 2421a is engaged. In this case, even if all the cutouts 2422a to 2422c are engaged with all the projections 2421a to 2421c, the pattern C (reel sheet 2422) is displaced from the specific position by 120°.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, the distance L1a from the first notch portion 2422a to the second notch portion 2422b is the second notch portion 2422b to the third notch portion 2422c. To a distance L2a up to. In this case, if the cutouts corresponding to the protrusions (for example, the first cutouts 2422a corresponding to the first protrusions 2421a) are not engaged, all the cutouts 2422a to 2422c are set to all the protrusions 2421a to 2421c cannot be engaged. For example, when trying to engage the second cutout portion 2422b with the first projection portion 2421a, the circumferential positions of the other cutout portions 2422a and 2422c are displaced relative to the other projection portions 2421b and 2421c, and are engaged with each other. It becomes impossible.

As described above, the reel sheet 2422 according to the present embodiment has a pattern in which all the cutouts 2422a to 2422c can be engaged with all the projections 2421a to 2421c even if the reel seat 2422 includes the plurality of cutouts 2422a to 2422c. Can be one. Accordingly, the reel sheet 2422 can be moved to a specific position of the base member 2421 by simply engaging the first cutout portion 2422a to the third cutout portion 2422c with the first projection portion 2421a to the third projection portion 2421c. Can be placed accurately. According to this, after the reel sheet 2422 is attached to the base member 2421, it is not necessary to realign the attachment position of the reel sheet 2422 with respect to the base member 2421.

Further, since the reel sheet 2422 is only contained in the base member 2421 (not attached with the double-sided tape), it can be smoothly contained in the base member 2421. Further, it is not necessary to remove the double-sided tape when the orientation of the reel sheet 2422 is changed after being housed in the base member 2421, and the reel sheet 2422 can be smoothly rotated relative to the base member 2421. Therefore, the efficiency of the work of attaching the reel seat 2422 to the base member 2421 can be effectively improved.

Further, in the reel sheet 2422, the first notch portion 2422a to the third notch portion 2422c are only engaged with the first protruding portion 2421a to the third protruding portion 2421c. Therefore, the reel sheet 2422 can be easily taken out only by pulling it out from the base member 2421. According to this, the detachability of the base member 2421 and the reel seat 2422 can be improved, and the base member 2421 and the reel seat 2422 can be easily reused.

Further, the overlapping portion 2422d of the reel sheet 2422 according to the present embodiment is formed in a portion where the pattern C is not printed. According to this, the overlapping portion 2422d can be made inconspicuous, so that the aesthetic appearance can be improved.

The first cutout portion 2422a according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the first position specifying means according to the present invention.
Further, the second cutout portion 2422b according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the second position specifying means according to the present invention.
Further, the third cutout portion 2422c according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the position specifying means according to the present invention.
Further, the first protrusion 2421a, the second protrusion 2421b, and the third protrusion 2421c according to the present embodiment are one embodiment of the base member engaging portion according to the present invention.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine, but it is not limited to this and may be a slot machine or the like.

Further, although the number of the protrusions and the notches is three in the present embodiment, the number of the protrusions and the notches is not limited to this, and may be two or four or more, for example. Good. However, from the viewpoint that the positioning accuracy can be improved, it is preferable that the number of protrusions and notches is three or more. When the number of protrusions and cutouts is two, the distance from the first cutout to the second cutout (the clockwise direction in FIG. 95) and the distance from the second cutout to the first cutout are The distance to the notch portion (distance in the clockwise direction in FIG. 95) may be different.

Further, the place where the three cutout portions 2422a to 2422c are formed on the reel sheet 2422 is not limited to the left end portion. The three cutout portions 2422a to 2422c may be formed on the right end portion of the reel sheet 2422, for example. In this case, the three notches 2422a to 2422c may engage with the right mounting member 2424.

Further, the three cutout portions 2422a to 2422c are formed on the left end portion of the reel sheet 2422 (arranged so as to be aligned in the left-right direction), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left and right portions are mutually formed. It may be offset in the direction.

Further, the reel seat 2422 may be configured to engage with the base member 2421 and the right side mounting member 2424, respectively. In such a case, the reel sheet 2422 is formed with, for example, three notches at the left end and the right end thereof, respectively. The right mounting member 2424 also includes three protrusions that can engage with the notches on the right side of the reel seat 2422. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the reel sheet 2422 from rotating relative to the base member 2421 at the left end portion and the right end portion of the reel seat 2422. Accordingly, the relative rotation of the reel sheet 2422 with respect to the base member 2421 can be reliably prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reel sheet 2422 is provided with the plurality of cutout portions 2422a to 2422c, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be provided with a plurality of projection portions. Good. In this case, the base member 2421 has a cutout portion that can engage with the plurality of protrusions.

Further, although the reel sheet 2422 uses the three cutout portions 2422a to 2422c as a guide for the attachment position, the guideline for the attachment position is not limited to the cutout portion, and a plurality of printed sheets on the outer peripheral surface of the reel sheet 2422 may be used. May be a mark of. In this case, the plurality of marks function as the position specifying means according to the present invention.

Further, the configuration of the drum body 2420 is not limited to this embodiment, and for example, the drum body 2520 according to the modified examples shown in FIGS. 98 and 99 can be configured.

The drum body 2520 according to the modified example is different from the drum body 2420 according to the present embodiment in the configurations of the base member 2521 and the left side attachment member 2523. The base member 2521 has an opening 2521f in addition to the configuration of the base member 2421 according to this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the opening 2521f is formed in the upper rear portion of the bottom surface of the base member 2521 and penetrates the bottom surface of the base member 2521 in the left-right direction. The opening portion 2521f is formed such that its radial width (thickness) becomes gradually narrower (tapered) toward the right.

As shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, the left-side mounting member 2523 includes a holding portion 2523c in addition to the configuration of the left-side mounting member 2423 according to this embodiment. The holding portion 2523c is formed so as to extend in the circumferential direction of the left side attachment member 2523. The pressing portion 2523c is formed on the rear upper portion of the right side surface of the left side attachment member 2523. The holding portion 2523c projects rightward from the right side surface of the left side attachment member 2523. The pressing portion 2523c is formed such that its radial width (thickness) becomes gradually narrower (tapered shape) toward the right. As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the holding portion 2523c is inserted into the opening 2521f of the base member 2521. The pressing portion 2523c is arranged slightly inward (about twice the thickness of the reel sheet 2422) in the radial direction with respect to the inner peripheral surface of the base member 2521.

In the modification, when the reel sheet 2422 is accommodated in the base member 2521, the overlapping portion 2422d is arranged between the inner peripheral surface of the base member 2521 and the holding portion 2523c of the left side mounting member 2523. The overlapping portion 2422d is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of the base member 2421 by the pressing portion 2523c.

With this structure, the overlapping portion 2422d can be held by the pressing portion 2523c. As a result, it is possible to prevent the overlapping portion 2422d (the end portion of the reel sheet 2422 in the circumferential direction) from being deformed so as to warp inward in the radial direction and a gap being generated. According to this, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the gap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the appearance from being impaired.

The configuration of the effect device 3400 according to the second embodiment of the first movable accessory unit will be described in detail below.

101 is a device for giving a visual impression (impact) to the player by rotating a drum-shaped accessory (a drum body 3420 described later). As shown in FIGS. 101 to 103, the rendering device 3400 includes a mounting base 3410, a drum body 3420, a light emitting unit 3430, and a drive transmission mechanism 3440.

The mounting base 3410 supports a drum body 3420 and the like described later. The mounting base 3410 includes a housing member 3411, a right side receiving member 3412, a left side receiving member 3413, and a shaft member 3414.

The housing member 3411 is for housing the drum body 3420 and the like. The accommodating member 3411 is formed in a bottomed substantially cylindrical shape with its axial direction directed in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the housing member 3411 is disposed on the right side, and the left portion and the front portion thereof are open. The housing member 3411 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42 via the decorative member of the effect device 3400 and the like.

The right side receiving member 3412 is for supporting the right end portion of the drum body 3420. The right side receiving member 3412 is formed in a substantially disc shape. The right side receiving member 3412 is formed so that the outer diameter thereof can be accommodated in the accommodating member 3411. The right side receiving member 3412 is fixed to the bottom surface (right end portion) of the accommodating member 3411 with a screw and accommodated in the accommodating member 3411.

The left side receiving member 3413 is for supporting the left end portion of the drum body 3420. The left side receiving member 3413 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface oriented in the left-right direction. The left side receiving member 3413 is formed such that its front-rear width is substantially the same as the front-rear width of the accommodating member 3411. Further, the left side receiving member 3413 is formed so that the vertical width thereof is wider than the vertical width of the housing member 3411. The lower part of the right side surface of the left side receiving member 3413 is recessed leftward except for a part thereof. The lower part of the left side receiving member 3413 is fixed to the left end portion of the housing member 3411 with a screw. The left side receiving member 3413 includes an outer protruding portion 3413a and an inner protruding portion 3413b.

The outer protruding portion 3413a is formed on the lower portion (recessed portion) of the right side surface of the left receiving member 3413. The outer protruding portion 3413a projects rightward from the right side surface of the left receiving member 3413. The outer protruding portion 3413a is formed in a substantially annular shape in a side view.

The inner protrusion 3413b protrudes rightward from the center of the outer protrusion 3413a. The inner protruding portion 3413b is formed in a substantially annular shape in a side view. The inner edge of the inner protruding portion 3413b is formed into a substantially hexagonal shape in a side view.

As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the shaft member 3414 is a substantially hexagonal columnar member whose axial direction is the left-right direction. The left end portion of the shaft member 3414 is supported by the inner protruding portion 3413b. The right end portion of the shaft member 3414 is supported by the bottom surface of the housing member 3411 and the right side receiving member 3412. The shaft member 3414 supports a light emitting unit 3430, which will be described later, via a connecting member 3414a attached to the left and right midway portions thereof.

The drum body 3420 is a member for rotating the pattern C. As shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the drum body 3420 includes a base member 3421, a reel seat 3422, a left side mounting member 3423, and a right side mounting member 3424.

The base member 3421 is for accommodating a reel sheet 3422 described later. The base member 3421 is formed in the shape of a hollow truncated cone whose axial direction is directed in the left-right direction. The base member 3421 is formed such that its outer diameter and inner diameter gradually decrease from the right end toward the left end. The base member 3421 is formed such that the outer diameter of the right end portion of the base member 3421 can be housed in the housing member 3411 (see FIG. 101). The left portion of the base member 3421 is closed and the right portion thereof is opened. The base member 3421 is made of a transparent resin material and is configured to be visible inside. As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the base member 3421 includes a first protrusion 3421a, a second protrusion 3421b, a third protrusion 3421c, a through hole 3421d, and an engagement hole 3421e.

The first protrusion 3421a protrudes radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3421. The first protruding portion 3421a is arranged at the left end of the base member 3421 and is formed so as to be continuous with the bottom surface of the base member 3421. Thus, the first protrusion 3421a is formed so as to protrude rightward from the bottom surface of the base member 3421. The first protrusion 3421a is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a side view. The first protrusion 3421a is formed at the rear end of the bottom surface of the base member 3421 (the position at 3 o'clock in FIG. 107).

The second protrusion 3421b is formed in substantially the same shape as the first protrusion 3421a. The second protrusion 3421b is arranged at a distance from the first protrusion 3421a in the circumferential direction of the base member 3421. The second protrusion 3421b is formed on the front upper part of the bottom surface of the base member 3421 (the position between 10 o'clock and 11 o'clock of the timepiece in FIG. 107).

The third protrusion 3421c is formed so as to be vertically symmetrical with respect to the second protrusion 3421b with respect to the vertical center of the base member 3421. The third protrusion 3421c is formed in the lower front portion of the bottom surface of the base member 3421 (a position between 7 o'clock and 8 o'clock in the timepiece in FIG. 107).

The through hole 3421d is a hole formed in the bottom surface of the base member 3421 and having a substantially circular shape in a side view. The through hole 3421d has an inner diameter that allows the shaft member 3414 to be inserted therethrough. The through hole 3421d penetrates the center of the bottom surface of the base member 3421 in the left-right direction.

The engagement hole 3421e is a substantially quadrangular hole formed at the right end of the base member 3421. The engagement hole 3421e penetrates the base member 3421 from the outer peripheral surface to the inner peripheral surface in the radial direction. The plurality of engaging holes 3421e (three in the present embodiment) are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction.

As shown in FIG. 101, the base member 3421 configured as described above is attached to the housing member 3411 via a left-side attachment member 3423 described below. As a result, the base member 3421 is housed in the housing member 3411 and is visible to the player from the front. Further, as shown in FIG. 102, the shaft member 3414 is inserted into the through hole 3421d of the base member 3421. The base member 3421 is provided on the mounting base 3410 so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft member 3414.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the reel sheet 3422 is a member having a pattern C printed on the outer peripheral surface. The pattern C enhances the interest of the player by making the player visually recognize or not at the time of game production. In this embodiment, as the design C, a plurality of designs such as a numerical design "111" and a character design "HIT" are adopted. Further, the design C is omitted as appropriate in the drawings except the exploded perspective views (FIGS. 105, 106 and 111) in order to make other members easy to see.
The reel sheet 3422 is formed by rolling a sheet-shaped member. The reel seat 3422 is formed such that its outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the base member 3421. The reel sheet 3422 is formed such that its width in the left-right direction is shorter than the width in the left-right direction of the base member 3421. The reel sheet 3422 is coated with a light-transmitting coating on a portion corresponding to the pattern C on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and is coated with a non-light-transmitting (shielding) coating on the other portions. As a result, the reel sheet 3422 is configured to be able to transmit light in the portion where the design C is printed and to be unable to transmit light in the portion where the design C is not printed. As shown in FIGS. 106 and 108, the reel sheet 3422 includes a first cutout portion 3422a, a second cutout portion 3422b, a third cutout portion 3422c, and an overlapping portion 3422d.

The first cutout portion 3422a is formed at the left rear end portion of the reel seat 3422. The first cutout portion 3422a is formed in a substantially arc shape. The first cutout 3422a corresponds to the first protrusion 3421a of the base member 3421. That is, the first cutout 3422a is configured to be engageable with the first protrusion 3421a.

The second cutout portion 3422b is formed to have substantially the same shape as the first cutout portion 3422a. The second cutouts 3422b are arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction of the reel sheet 3422 with respect to the first cutouts 3422a. The second cutout portion 3422b is formed in the front upper portion of the left end portion of the reel seat 3422. The second cutout 3422b corresponds to the second protrusion 3421b. That is, the second cutout 3422b is configured to be engageable with the second protrusion 3421b.

The third cutout portion 3422c is formed so as to be vertically symmetrical with respect to the second cutout portion 3422b with respect to the vertical center portion of the reel sheet 3422. The third cutout portion 3422c is formed in the lower front portion of the left end portion of the reel seat 3422. The third cutout 3422c corresponds to the third protrusion 3421c. That is, the third cutout 3422c is configured to be engageable with the third protrusion 3421c.

The distance L1b in the clockwise direction in FIG. 108 from the first notch portion 3422a to the second notch portion 3422b is the clockwise direction in FIG. 108 from the second notch portion 3422b to the third notch portion 3422c. Is formed to be longer than the distance L2b.

The overlapping portion 3422d is a portion (one end portion and the other end portion in the circumferential direction) where the reel sheets 3422 overlap in the radial direction. The overlapping portion 3422d is formed from the left end portion to the right end portion of the reel sheet 3422. The overlapping portion 3422d is formed in a portion where the pattern C is not printed. The overlapping portion 3422d is formed in a portion where the first cutout portion 3422a, the second cutout portion 3422b, and the third cutout portion 3422c are not formed. The overlapping portion 3422d according to the present embodiment is formed on the rear upper portion of the reel sheet 3422.

The reel sheet 3422 thus configured is housed in the base member 3421 as shown in FIGS. 106 and 109. At this time, the first cutout portion 3422a engages with the first protrusion 3421a. Further, the second cutout portion 3422b engages with the second protruding portion 3421b. The third cutout 3422c engages with the third protrusion 3421c. As described above, the reel sheet 3422 is configured such that the symbol C is arranged at a specific position on the base member 3421 and is rotatable integrally with the base member 3421. Further, the symbol C of the reel sheet 3422 becomes visible from the outside of the base member 3421 when the reel sheet 3422 is accommodated in the base member 3421.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the left-side mounting member 3423 is an external gear for rotating the base member 3421. The left mounting member 3423 includes a recess 3423a and a through hole 3423b.

The recessed portion 3423a is a recess formed in the left side surface of the left side attachment member 3423 and having a substantially circular shape in a side view. The recess 3423a is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the outer protruding portion 3413a of the left receiving member 3413 (see FIG. 110).

The through hole 3423b is a hole that penetrates the center of the left side attachment member 3423 in the left-right direction. The through hole 3423b is formed in a substantially circular shape in a side view having an inner diameter that allows the shaft member 3414 to be inserted therethrough.

The left mounting member 3423 thus configured is fixed to the bottom surface (left end portion) of the base member 3421 with a screw. As a result, the left mounting member 3423 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 3421. Further, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 110, the left side mounting member 3423 is supported by the left side receiving member 3413 so as to be relatively rotatable by fitting the concave portion 3423a into the outer protruding portion 3413a of the left side receiving member 3413. Further, the shaft member 3414 is inserted into the through hole 3423b of the left side attachment member 3423. Accordingly, the left side mounting member 3423 is provided on the mounting base 3410 so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft member 3414.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the right side attachment member 3424 is a substantially annular member attached to the right end portion of the base member 3421. The right mounting member 3424 is formed such that the outer diameter of the left end portion thereof is smaller than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 3421. The right mounting member 3424 includes a flange portion 3424a and a claw portion 3424b.

The flange portion 3424a is formed on the right and left midway portions of the right side mounting member 3424. The flange portion 3424a is formed such that the outer diameter thereof is larger than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 3421 and smaller than the outer diameter of the right end portion of the base member 3421.

The claw portion 3424b is formed on the left end portion of the right mounting member 3424. A tip portion of the claw portion 3424b projects radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the right mounting member 3424. A plurality of claw portions 3424b are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction. More specifically, the three claw portions 3424b are formed at substantially the same intervals as the intervals in the circumferential direction of the engagement holes 3421e of the base member 3421.

The left end of the right mounting member 3424 configured as described above is inserted into the right end of the base member 3421, and the tip end of the claw portion 3424b engages with the engagement hole 3421e of the base member 3421. Accordingly, the right side mounting member 3424 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 3421. Further, as shown in FIG. 102, the right side attachment member 3424 is supported by the right side reception member 3412 so as to be relatively rotatable by fitting the right end portion thereof into the recess formed in the right side reception member 3412.

The light emitting unit 3430 is for radiating light in the front direction. The light emitting unit 3430 is housed in the drum body 3420. The light emitting unit 3430 includes a substrate 3431 and an LED 3432.

The substrate 3431 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape and is arranged with its plate surface facing the front-rear direction. The substrate 3431 is arranged inside the reel sheet 3422. The substrate 3431 is disposed behind the shaft member 3414 and is fixed to the shaft member 3414 via the connecting member 3414a. As a result, the substrate 3431 is held by the mounting base 3410 with the plate surface thereof oriented in the front-rear direction even when the drum body 3420 rotates (configured so as not to rotate integrally with the drum body 3420). ).

The LEDs 3432 are disposed on the lower left portion, the upper portion (upper portion in the left and right central portion) and the lower right portion of the substrate 3431. The LED 3432 is configured to be able to emit light in the forward direction when turned on.

The drive transmission mechanism 3440 is for transmitting a driving force to the drum body 3420. As shown in FIGS. 102 and 110, the drive transmission mechanism 3440 is provided on the left side receiving member 3413. The drive transmission mechanism 3440 includes a motor 3441, an upper gear 3442 and a lower gear 3443.

The motor 3441 is supported on the left side receiving member 3413. The motor 3441 is arranged above the housing member 3411. The rotation shaft 3441a of the motor 3441 is formed to extend leftward from the main body of the motor 3441.

The upper gear 3442 is an external gear fixed to the rotating shaft 3441a of the motor 3441 via the bush 3442a. The upper gear 3442 is arranged above the left mounting member 3423.

The lower gear 3443 is an external gear rotatably supported by the left receiving member 3413. The lower gear 3443 is disposed between the upper gear 3442 and the left mounting member 3423 and meshes with the upper gear 3442 and the left mounting member 3423, respectively.

Next, an operation mode of rendering device 3400 will be described. As an example of the operation mode of the rendering device 3400, from a state in which the player cannot see the pattern C (a state in which the symbol C does not face forward) to a state in which it can be seen (a state in which the symbol C faces forward). An operation mode in the case of changing the state will be described.

First, rendering device 3400 turns on LED 3432 and drives motor 3441. As a result, the power of the motor 3441 is transmitted in the order of the rotating shaft 3441a, the upper gear 3442, the lower gear 3443, and the left side mounting member 3423, and the left side mounting member 3423 rotates in the circumferential direction about the axis thereof. Accordingly, the drum body 3420 rotates relative to the mounting base 3410 and the light emitting unit 3430.

After that, rendering device 3400 stops motor 3441. As a result, the rendering device 3400 causes the predetermined pattern C (for example, “111” shown in FIG. 105) printed on the reel sheet 3422 to be arranged at the front end portion. As a result, the rendering device 3400 causes the player to display the predetermined symbol C and causes the light from the LED 3432 to pass through from the reel sheet 3422. In this way, the rendering device 3400 gives the player the impression that the predetermined pattern C is emitting light.

As shown in FIG. 109, the drum main body 3420 according to the present embodiment includes a first cutout portion 3422a to a third cutout portion 3422c and a first protrusion 3421a to a third protrusion 3421c, respectively. Engaged. According to this, it is possible to prevent the reel sheet 3422 from rotating relative to the base member 3421. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the symbol C displayed to the player from being displaced by the relative rotation of the reel sheet 3422.

Further, according to the drum body 3420 according to the present embodiment, the relative rotation of the reel sheet 3422 can be prevented without using the double-sided tape, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, the work of assembling the drum body 3420 will be described.

First, the reel sheet 3422 shown in FIGS. 105 and 106 is rolled and accommodated in the base member 3421. At this time, the reel sheet 3422 is rolled so that the end portions in the circumferential direction of the reel sheet 3422 overlap each other in the radial direction. As a result, the overlapping portion 3422d is formed. Then, the reel sheet 3422 is inserted into the base member 3421 so that the first cutout portion 3422a to the third cutout portion 3422c and the first projection portion 3421a to the third projection portion 3421c are engaged with each other. (See FIG. 109). As a result, the reel seat 3422 is attached to the base member 3421. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first notch portion 3422a to the third notch portion 3422c are used as a guide for the attachment position to the base member 3421.

Next, the left side mounting member 3423 is brought into contact with the base member 3421, and the base member 3421 and the left side mounting member 3423 are fixed by screws.

After that, the left end portion of the right mounting member 3424 is inserted into the right end portion of the base member 3421, and the claw portion 3424b of the right mounting member 3424 is engaged with the engaging hole 3421e of the base member 3421. By the above, the assembling work of the drum body 3420 is completed.

The reel sheet 3422 according to the present embodiment can determine (position) a position in the circumferential direction with respect to the base member 3421 with reference to the plurality of cutout portions 3422a to 3422c. According to this, as compared with the case where the reel sheet 3422 is positioned with only one notch, the positioning can be performed with higher accuracy.

Here, if the plurality of cutout portions 3422a to 3422c (and the plurality of protrusion portions 3421a to 3421c) are arranged at the same intervals in the circumferential direction, the pattern C is specified to the base member 3421 during assembly. There is a case that the position is shifted in the circumferential direction (rotational direction). Specifically, when the first notch 3422a is engaged with the second protrusion 3421b, the second notch 3422b is engaged with the third protrusion 3421c and the third notch 3422c is moved to the first notch 3422c. The first projection 3421a is engaged. In this case, even if all the cutouts 3422a to 3422c are engaged with all the projections 3421a to 3421c, the pattern C (reel sheet 3422) is displaced from the specific position by 120°.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the distance L1b from the first notch portion 3422a to the second notch portion 3422b is from the second notch portion 3422b to the third notch portion 3422c. To a distance L2b up to. In this case, if notches (for example, the first notches 3422a corresponding to the first protrusions 3421a) corresponding to the protrusions are not engaged, all notches 3422a to 3422c are generated at all the protrusions 3421a to 3421a. Cannot engage with 3421c. For example, when trying to engage the second notch 3422b with the first protrusion 3421a, the positions of the other notches 3422a and 3422c in the circumferential direction are displaced with respect to the other protrusions 3421b and 3421c. It becomes impossible.

As described above, the reel sheet 3422 according to the present embodiment has a pattern capable of engaging all the cutouts 3422a to 3422c with all the projections 3421a to 3421c even if the reel seat 3422 includes the plurality of cutouts 3422a to 3422c. Can be one. Accordingly, the reel sheet 3422 can be moved to a specific position of the base member 3421 only by engaging the first notch portion 3422a to the third notch portion 3422c with the first protruding portion 3421a to the third protruding portion 3421c. Can be placed accurately. According to this, after the reel sheet 3422 is attached to the base member 3421, it is not necessary to realign the attachment position of the reel sheet 3422 with respect to the base member 3421.

Further, since the reel sheet 3422 is only stored in the base member 3421 (not attached with the double-sided tape), it can be smoothly stored in the base member 3421. Further, it is not necessary to remove the double-sided tape when the orientation of the reel sheet 3422 is changed after it is housed in the base member 3421, and the reel sheet 3422 can be smoothly rotated relative to the base member 3421. Therefore, the efficiency of the work of attaching the reel seat 3422 to the base member 3421 can be effectively improved.

Further, in the reel sheet 3422, the first notch portion 3422a to the third notch portion 3422c are only engaged with the first protruding portion 3421a to the third protruding portion 3421c. Therefore, the reel seat 3422 can be easily taken out only by pulling it out from the base member 3421. According to this, the detachability of the base member 3421 and the reel seat 3422 can be improved, and the base member 3421 and the reel seat 3422 can be easily reused.

Further, the overlapping portion 3422d of the reel sheet 3422 according to this embodiment is formed in a portion where the pattern C is not printed. According to this, the overlapping portion 3422d can be made inconspicuous, so that the aesthetic appearance can be improved.

The three protrusions 3421a to 3421c according to the present embodiment are an embodiment of the base member engaging portion according to the present invention.
Further, the three cutout portions 3422a to 3422c according to the present embodiment are one embodiment of the reel seat engaging portion according to the present invention.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine, but it is not limited to this and may be a slot machine or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of protrusions and cutouts is three, but the number of protrusions and cutouts is not limited to this, and may be one or four or more, for example. Good. However, from the viewpoint that the positioning accuracy can be improved, it is preferable that the number of protrusions and notches is three or more.

The three protrusions 3421a to 3421c and the three notches 3422a to 3422c may be arranged at the same intervals in the rotation direction of the drum body 3420.

Further, the location where the three cutout portions 3422a to 3422c are formed on the reel sheet 3422 is not limited to the left end portion. The three cutout portions 3422a to 3422c may be formed on the right end portion of the reel sheet 3422, for example. In this case, the three protrusions 3421a to 3421c are formed on the right side of the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3421.

Further, although the three cutout portions 3422a to 3422c are formed on the left end portion of the reel seat 3422 (arranged so as to be aligned in the left-right direction), the present invention is not limited to this, and the left and right portions may be separated from each other. It may be offset in the direction.

Further, the reel seat 3422 may be configured to engage with the base member 3421 and the right side mounting member 3424, respectively. In such a case, the reel sheet 3422 is provided with, for example, three notches at the left end and the right end thereof, respectively. The right mounting member 3424 includes three protrusions that can engage with the notches on the right side of the reel seat 3422. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the reel sheet 3422 from rotating relative to the base member 3421 at the left end portion and the right end portion of the reel seat 3422. Thereby, the relative rotation of the reel seat 3422 with respect to the base member 3421 can be reliably prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reel sheet 3422 is provided with the plurality of cutout portions 3422a to 3422c, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be provided with a plurality of projection portions. Good. In this case, the base member 3421 includes a cutout portion that can engage with the plurality of protrusions.

The base member 3421 is made of a transparent resin material as a whole, but is not limited to this. The base member 3421 should just be able to see the pattern C from the outside. That is, at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of the base member 3421 may be transparent. Specifically, for example, the base member 3421 may have a half of the outer peripheral surface formed of a transparent resin material.

Further, the configuration of the drum body 3420 is not limited to this embodiment, and for example, the configuration of the drum body 3520 according to the modified examples shown in FIGS. 111 and 112 can be adopted.

The drum main body 3520 according to the modified example is different from the drum main body 3420 according to the present embodiment in the configurations of the base member 3521 and the left side attachment member 3523. The base member 3521 has an opening 3521f in addition to the configuration of the base member 3421 according to this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the opening 3521f is formed in the upper rear portion of the bottom surface of the base member 3521 and penetrates the bottom surface of the base member 3521 in the left-right direction. The opening 3521f is formed so that its radial width (thickness) gradually becomes narrower (tapered) as it goes to the right.

As shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, the left side attachment member 3523 includes a holding portion 3523c in addition to the configuration of the left side attachment member 3423 according to this embodiment. The pressing portion 3523c is formed so as to extend in the circumferential direction of the left side attachment member 3523. The pressing portion 3523c is formed on the rear upper portion of the right side surface of the left side attachment member 3523. The pressing portion 3523c projects rightward from the right side surface of the left side attachment member 3523. The pressing portion 3523c is formed such that its radial width (thickness) becomes gradually narrower (tapered shape) toward the right. As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the pressing portion 3523c is inserted into the opening 3521f of the base member 3521. The pressing portion 3523c is arranged slightly inward (about twice the thickness of the reel seat 3422) in the radial direction with respect to the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3521.

In the modification, when the reel sheet 3422 is housed in the base member 3521, the overlapping portion 3422d is arranged between the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3521 and the holding portion 3523c of the left side mounting member 3523. The overlapping portion 3422d is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3421 by the pressing portion 3523c.

With such a structure, the overlapping portion 3422d can be held by the pressing portion 3523c. As a result, it is possible to prevent the overlapping portion 3422d (the end portion of the reel sheet 3422 in the circumferential direction) from being deformed so as to be warped inward in the radial direction to form a gap. According to this, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the gap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the appearance from being impaired.

The configuration of the rendering device 4400 according to the third embodiment of the first movable accessory unit will be described in detail below.

114 is a device for giving a visual impression (impact) to the player by rotating a drum-shaped accessory (a drum body 4420 described later). As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the rendering device 4400 includes a mounting base 4410, a drum body 4420, a light emitting unit 4430, and a drive transmission mechanism 4440.

The mounting base 4410 supports a drum body 4420 and the like described later. The mounting base 4410 includes a housing member 4411, a right side receiving member 4412, a left side receiving member 4413, and a shaft member 4414.

The housing member 4411 is for housing the drum body 4420 and the like. The accommodating member 4411 is formed in a bottomed substantially cylindrical shape with its axial direction directed in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the housing member 4411 is disposed on the right side, and the left portion and the front portion thereof are open. The housing member 4411 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42 via the decorative member of the effect device 4400.

The right side receiving member 4412 is for supporting the right end portion of the drum body 4420. The right side receiving member 4412 is formed in a substantially disc shape. The right side receiving member 4412 is formed so that the outer diameter thereof can be accommodated in the accommodating member 4411. The right side receiving member 4412 is fixed to the bottom surface (right end portion) of the housing member 4411 with a screw and housed in the housing member 4411.

The left side receiving member 4413 is for supporting the left end portion of the drum body 4420. The left side receiving member 4413 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface oriented in the left-right direction. The left side receiving member 4413 is formed such that the width in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the housing member 4411. Further, the left side receiving member 4413 is formed such that the vertical width thereof is wider than the vertical width of the housing member 4411. The lower part of the right side surface of the left side receiving member 4413 is recessed leftward except for a part thereof. The lower part of the left side receiving member 4413 is fixed to the left end portion of the housing member 4411 with a screw. The left side receiving member 4413 includes an outer protruding portion 4413a and an inner protruding portion 4413b.

The outer protruding portion 4413a is formed in the lower portion (recessed portion) of the right side surface of the left receiving member 4413. The outer protruding portion 4413a projects rightward from the right side surface of the left receiving member 4413. The outer protruding portion 4413a is formed in a substantially annular shape in a side view.

The inner protruding portion 4413b protrudes rightward from the center of the outer protruding portion 4413a. The inner protruding portion 4413b is formed in a substantially annular shape in a side view. The inner edge of the inner protruding portion 4413b is formed in a substantially hexagonal shape in a side view.

As shown in FIGS. 115 and 116, the shaft member 4414 is a substantially hexagonal columnar member whose axial direction is directed in the left-right direction. The left end portion of the shaft member 4414 is supported by the inner protruding portion 4413b. The right end portion of the shaft member 4414 is supported by the bottom surface of the housing member 4411 and the right side receiving member 4412. The shaft member 4414 supports a light emitting unit 4430, which will be described later, via a connecting member 4414a attached to the left and right midway portions thereof.

The drum body 4420 is a member for rotating the pattern C. As shown in FIGS. 117 to 119, the drum body 4420 includes a base member 4421, a reel seat 4422, a left side mounting member 4423, and a right side mounting member 4424.

The base member 4421 is for accommodating a reel sheet 4422 described later. The base member 4421 is formed in a hollow, generally circular truncated cone shape with its axis extending in the left-right direction. The base member 4421 is formed such that its outer diameter and inner diameter gradually decrease from the right end toward the left end. The base member 4421 is formed such that the outer diameter of the right end portion of the base member 4421 can be housed in the housing member 4411 (see FIG. 114). The left portion of the base member 4421 is closed and the right portion thereof is opened. The base member 4421 is made of a transparent resin material and is configured to be visible inside. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the base member 4421 includes a first protrusion 4421a, a second protrusion 4421b, a third protrusion 4421c, a through hole 4421d, an engagement hole 4421e, and an opening 4421f. To do.

The first protrusion 4421a projects radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421. The first protruding portion 4421a is arranged at the left end portion of the base member 4421 and is formed so as to be continuous with the bottom surface of the base member 4421. Thus, the first protrusion 4421a is formed so as to protrude rightward from the bottom surface of the base member 4421. The 1st protrusion part 4421a is formed in side view substantially square shape. The first protrusion 4421a is formed at the rear end of the bottom surface of the base member 4421 (the position at 3 o'clock in FIG. 120).

The second protrusion 4421b is formed to have substantially the same shape as the first protrusion 4421a. The second protrusion 4421b is arranged at a distance from the first protrusion 4421a in the circumferential direction of the base member 4421. The second protrusion 4421b is formed on the front upper part of the bottom surface of the base member 4421 (the position between 10 o'clock and 11 o'clock of the timepiece in FIG. 120).

The third protrusion 4421c is formed so as to be vertically symmetrical with respect to the second protrusion 4421b with respect to the vertical center of the base member 4421. The third protrusion 4421c is formed at the lower front portion of the bottom surface of the base member 4421 (a position between 7 o'clock and 8 o'clock in the timepiece in FIG. 120).

The through hole 4421d is a hole formed in the bottom surface of the base member 4421 and having a substantially circular shape in a side view. The through hole 4421d has an inner diameter that allows the shaft member 4414 to be inserted therethrough. The through hole 4421d penetrates the center of the bottom surface of the base member 4421 in the left-right direction.

The engagement hole 4421e is a substantially rectangular hole formed in the right end portion of the base member 4421. The engagement hole 4421e penetrates the base member 4421 from the outer peripheral surface to the inner peripheral surface in the radial direction. The plurality of engagement holes 4421e (three in the present embodiment) are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction.

The opening 4421f is a hole formed so as to extend in the circumferential direction of the base member 4421. The opening 4421f is formed in the upper rear portion of the bottom surface of the base member 4421. The opening 4421f penetrates the bottom surface of the base member 4421 in the left-right direction. The opening 4421f is formed such that its radial width (thickness) becomes gradually narrower (tapered shape) toward the right (see FIG. 124).

As shown in FIG. 114, the base member 4421 configured in this way is attached to the housing member 4411 via a left-hand side attachment member 4423 described below. As a result, the base member 4421 is housed in the housing member 4411 and is visible to the player from the front. Further, as shown in FIG. 115, the shaft member 4414 is inserted into the through hole 4421d of the base member 4421. The base member 4421 is provided on the mounting base 4410 so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft member 4414.

As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the reel sheet 4422 is a member having a pattern C printed on the outer peripheral surface. The pattern C enhances the interest of the player by making the player visually recognize or not at the time of game production. In this embodiment, as the design C, a plurality of designs such as a numerical design "111" and a character design "HIT" are adopted. Further, the design C is omitted as appropriate in the drawings except the exploded perspective views (FIGS. 118 and 119) in order to make other members easy to see.
The reel sheet 4422 is formed by rolling a sheet-shaped member. The reel seat 4422 is formed so that the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the base member 4421. The reel seat 4422 is formed such that its width in the left-right direction is shorter than the width in the left-right direction of the base member 4421. The reel sheet 4422 is coated with a light-transmitting coating on a portion corresponding to the pattern C on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and is coated with a non-light-transmitting (shielding) coating on the other portions. As a result, the reel sheet 4422 is configured to be able to transmit light in the portion where the design C is printed and not to transmit light in the portion where the design C is not printed. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 121, the reel sheet 4422 includes a first cutout portion 4422a, a second cutout portion 4422b, a third cutout portion 4422c, and an overlapping portion 4422d.

The first cutout portion 4422a is formed at the left rear end portion of the reel seat 4422. The first cutout portion 4422a is formed in a substantially arc shape. The first cutout portion 4422a corresponds to the first protrusion portion 4421a of the base member 4421. That is, the first cutout 4422a is configured to be engageable with the first protrusion 4421a.

The second cutout portion 4422b is formed to have substantially the same shape as the first cutout portion 4422a. The second cutouts 4422b are arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction of the reel seat 4422 with respect to the first cutouts 4422a. The second cutout portion 4422b is formed in the upper front portion of the left end portion of the reel seat 4422. The second cutout portion 4422b corresponds to the second protrusion portion 4421b. That is, the second cutout portion 4422b is configured to be engageable with the second protruding portion 4421b.

The third cutout portion 4422c is formed so as to be vertically symmetrical with respect to the second cutout portion 4422b with respect to the vertical center portion of the reel sheet 4422. The third cutout portion 4422c is formed in the lower front portion of the left end portion of the reel seat 4422. The third cutout portion 4422c corresponds to the third protrusion portion 4421c. That is, the third cutout 4422c is configured to be engageable with the third protrusion 4421c.

The distance L1c in the clockwise direction in FIG. 121 from the first notch portion 4422a to the second notch portion 4422b is the clockwise direction in FIG. 121 from the second notch portion 4422b to the third notch portion 4422c. Is formed to be longer than the distance L2c.

The overlapping portion 4422d is a portion (one end portion and the other end portion in the circumferential direction) where the reel sheets 4422 overlap in the radial direction. The overlapping portion 4422d is formed from the left end portion to the right end portion of the reel sheet 4422. The overlapping portion 4422d is formed in a portion where the pattern C is not printed. The overlapping portion 4422d is formed in a portion where the first cutout portion 4422a, the second cutout portion 4422b, and the third cutout portion 4422c are not formed. The overlapping portion 4422d according to the present embodiment is formed on the rear upper portion of the reel sheet 4422.

The reel sheet 4422 thus configured is housed in the base member 4421 as shown in FIGS. 119 and 122. At this time, the first cutout portion 4422a engages with the first protruding portion 4421a. Further, the second cutout portion 4422b engages with the second protrusion portion 4421b. Further, the third cutout portion 4422c engages with the third protruding portion 4421c. As described above, the reel sheet 4422 is configured such that its symbol C is arranged at a specific position of the base member 4421 and is rotatable integrally with the base member 4421. Further, the design C of the reel sheet 4422 can be visually recognized from the outside of the base member 4421 in a state where the reel sheet 4422 is accommodated in the base member 4421.

As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the left-side mounting member 4423 is an external gear for rotating the base member 4421. The left mounting member 4423 includes a recess 4423a, a through hole 4423b, and a holding portion 4423c.

The recessed portion 4423a is a recess formed in the left side surface of the left side attachment member 4423 and having a substantially circular shape in a side view. The recess 4423a is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the outer protruding portion 4413a of the left receiving member 4413 (see FIG. 123).

The through hole 4423b is a hole that penetrates the center of the left side mounting member 4423 in the left-right direction. The through hole 4423b is formed in a substantially circular shape in a side view and has an inner diameter that allows the shaft member 4414 to be inserted therethrough.

The pressing portion 4423c projects rightward from the right side surface of the left side mounting member 4423. The pressing portion 4423c is formed on the rear upper portion of the right side surface of the left side mounting member 4423. The pressing portion 4423c is formed so as to extend in the circumferential direction of the left mounting member 4423 (in a side view substantially arcuate shape). The pressing portion 4423c is formed so that its radial width (thickness) becomes gradually narrower (tapered shape) toward the right (see FIG. 124). The pressing portion 4423c is formed so that it can be inserted into the opening portion 4421f of the base member 4421.

The left mounting member 4423 thus configured is fixed to the bottom surface (left end portion) of the base member 4421 with a screw. As a result, the left mounting member 4423 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 4421. Further, as shown in FIGS. 115 and 123, the left side mounting member 4423 is supported by the left side receiving member 4413 so as to be relatively rotatable by fitting the recess 4423a into the outer protruding portion 4413a of the left side receiving member 4413. Further, the shaft member 4414 is inserted into the through hole 4423b of the left side mounting member 4423. Accordingly, the left side mounting member 4423 is provided on the mounting base 4410 so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft member 4414.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 124, the pressing portion 4423c is inserted into the opening 4421f of the base member 4421. The pressing portion 4423c is arranged slightly inward (about twice the thickness of the reel seat 4422) in the radial direction with respect to the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421. In addition, the pressing portion 4423c is arranged inside the overlapping portion 4422d in the radial direction and presses the overlapping portion 4422d against the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421. As a result, the holding portion 4423c holds the overlapping portion 4422d in such a posture as to extend along the circumferential direction of the reel sheet 4422.

As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the right side attachment member 4424 is a substantially annular member attached to the right end portion of the base member 4421. The right mounting member 4424 is formed such that the outer diameter of the left end portion thereof is smaller than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 4421. The right mounting member 4424 includes a flange portion 4424a and a claw portion 4424b.

The flange portion 4424a is formed on the right and left midway portions of the right mounting member 4424. The flange portion 4424a is formed such that the outer diameter thereof is larger than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 4421 and smaller than the outer diameter of the right end portion of the base member 4421.

The claw portion 4424b is formed at the left end portion of the right side mounting member 4424. The tip portion of the claw portion 4424b projects radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the right side mounting member 4424. A plurality of claw portions 4424b are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction. More specifically, three claw portions 4424b are formed at intervals substantially the same as the circumferential intervals of the engagement holes 4421e of the base member 4421.

The left end portion of the right mounting member 4424 configured in this manner is inserted into the right end portion of the base member 4421, and the tip end portion of the claw portion 4424b engages with the engagement hole 4421e of the base member 4421. Accordingly, the right side mounting member 4424 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 4421. Further, as shown in FIG. 115, the right side mounting member 4424 is supported by the right side receiving member 4412 so as to be relatively rotatable by fitting the right end portion thereof into the recess formed in the right side receiving member 4412.

The light emitting unit 4430 is for irradiating light in the forward direction. The light emitting unit 4430 is housed in the drum body 4420. The light emitting unit 4430 includes a substrate 4431 and LEDs 4432.

The substrate 4431 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is arranged with its plate surface facing the front-rear direction. The substrate 4431 is arranged inside the reel seat 4422. The substrate 4431 is disposed behind the shaft member 4414 and is fixed to the shaft member 4414 via the connecting member 4414a. As a result, the substrate 4431 is held by the mounting base 4410 with the plate surface thereof oriented in the front-rear direction even if the drum body 4420 rotates (it is configured so as not to rotate integrally with the drum body 4420). ).

The LEDs 4432 are arranged on the lower left portion, the upper portion (upper portion in the left and right central portion) and the lower right portion of the substrate 4431. The LED 4432 is configured to be able to emit light in the forward direction by being turned on.

The drive transmission mechanism 4440 is for transmitting a driving force to the drum body 4420. As shown in FIGS. 115 and 123, the drive transmission mechanism 4440 is provided on the left side receiving member 4413. The drive transmission mechanism 4440 includes a motor 4441, an upper gear 4442, and a lower gear 4443.

The motor 4441 is supported on the left side receiving member 4413. The motor 4441 is arranged above the housing member 4411. The rotation shaft 4441a of the motor 4441 is formed to extend leftward from the main body of the motor 4441.

The upper gear 4442 is an external gear fixed to the rotation shaft 4441a of the motor 4441 via the bush 4442a. The upper gear 4442 is arranged above the left mounting member 4423.

The lower gear 4443 is an external gear rotatably supported by the left receiving member 4413. The lower gear 4443 is disposed between the upper gear 4442 and the left mounting member 4423, and meshes with the upper gear 4442 and the left mounting member 4423, respectively.

Next, an operation mode of effect device 4400 will be described. As an example of the operation mode of the rendering device 4400, from a state in which the player cannot see the pattern C (a state in which the symbol C does not face forward) to a state in which it can be seen (a state in which the symbol C faces forward). An operation mode in the case of changing the state will be described.

First, rendering device 4400 turns on LED 4432 and drives motor 4441. As a result, the power of the motor 4441 is transmitted in the order of the rotating shaft 4441a, the upper gear 4442, the lower gear 4443, and the left side mounting member 4423, and the left side mounting member 4423 rotates in the circumferential direction about the axis thereof. As a result, the drum body 4420 rotates relative to the mounting base 4410 and the light emitting unit 4430.

After that, rendering device 4400 stops motor 4441. As a result, the effect device 4400 causes the predetermined symbol C (for example, “111” shown in FIG. 118) printed on the reel sheet 4422 to be arranged at the front end portion. As a result, the effect device 4400 displays a predetermined symbol C to the player and causes the light from the LED 4432 to pass through the reel sheet 4422. In this way, the rendering device 4400 gives the player the impression that the predetermined pattern C is emitting light.

As shown in FIG. 122, the drum body 4420 according to the present embodiment includes a first cutout portion 4422a to a third cutout portion 4422c and a first projection portion 4421a to a third projection portion 4421c, respectively. Engaged. According to this, it is possible to prevent the reel sheet 4422 from rotating relative to the base member 4421. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the symbol C displayed to the player from being displaced by the relative rotation of the reel sheet 4422.

Next, the work of assembling the drum body 4420 will be described.

First, the reel sheet 4422 shown in FIGS. 118 and 119 is rolled and accommodated in the base member 4421. At this time, the reel sheet 4422 is rolled so that the circumferential ends of the reel sheet 4422 overlap each other in the radial direction. As a result, the overlapping portion 4422d is formed. Then, the reel sheet 4422 is inserted into the base member 4421 so that the first cutout portion 4422a to the third cutout portion 4422c and the first projection portion 4421a to the third projection portion 4421c are engaged with each other. (See FIG. 122). As a result, the reel seat 4422 is attached to the base member 4421. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first cutout portion 4422a to the third cutout portion 4422c are used as a guide for the attachment position to the base member 4421.

Next, the left side mounting member 4423 is brought into contact with the base member 4421, and the base member 4421 and the left side mounting member 4423 are fixed with screws. At this time, the pressing portion 4423c is inserted into the opening 4421f of the base member 4421. At this time, the pressing portion 4423c enters the inside of the base member 4421 with the overlapping portion 4422d interposed between the pressing portion 4423c and the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421 in the radial direction. In this way, when the base member 4421 and the left-side mounting member 4423 are fixed, the pressing portion 4423c is in a state where the overlapping portion 4422d is pressed against the inner peripheral surface (radially outer side) of the base member 4421 inside the base member 4421. Becomes

After that, the left end portion of the right mounting member 4424 is inserted into the right end portion of the base member 4421, and the claw portion 4424b of the right mounting member 4424 is engaged with the engagement hole 4421e of the base member 4421. By the above, the assembling work of the drum body 4420 is completed.

Since the drum body 4420 according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which the reel seat 4422 is housed in the base member 4421, the elasticity of the reel seat 4422 may restrict the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421 from trying to open. it can. According to this, the reel sheet 4422 can be held in a rolled state without attaching the reel sheet 4422 to the base member 4421 with the double-sided tape. Accordingly, when the reel sheet 4422 is attached to the base member 4421, the double-sided tape is not required, and the reel sheet 4422 can be smoothly accommodated in the base member 4421. Further, the reel sheet 4422 can be easily taken out from the base member 4421 simply by pulling it out from the base member 4421. According to this, the detachability of the base member 4421 and the reel seat 4422 can be improved, and the base member 4421 and the reel seat 4422 can be easily reused. In addition, the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the manufacturing cost.

Further, in the reel sheet 4422 according to this embodiment, the pressing portion 4423c suppresses the deformation of the overlapping portion 4422d. Specifically, when the left side mounting member 4423, which does not include the holding portion 4423c shown in FIG. 125(a), is assembled to the base member 4421, the reel sheet 4422 becomes the overlapping portion as shown in FIG. 125(b). Since the 4422d is not fixed, the end portion in the circumferential direction (more specifically, the end portion on the radially inner side) may be deformed so as to warp inward in the radial direction. As a result, the gap S may be formed. In this case, since the light of the LED 4432 leaks from the gap S, the gap S may be conspicuous and the appearance may be impaired.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 124, in the present embodiment, the overlapping portion 4422d is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421 by the pressing portion 4423c. According to this, the overlapping portion 4422d can be held in a predetermined posture (deformation can be suppressed). As a result, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the end portion of the reel sheet 4422 in the circumferential direction, and thus it is possible to prevent the appearance from being impaired.

Further, the overlapping portion 4422d of the reel sheet 4422 according to the present embodiment is formed in a portion where the pattern C is not printed. According to this, the overlapping portion 4422d can be made inconspicuous, so that the aesthetic appearance can be improved.

Further, the reel sheet 4422 according to the present embodiment can determine (position) the circumferential position with respect to the base member 4421 with reference to the plurality of cutout portions 4422a to 4422c. According to this, as compared with the case where the reel sheet 4422 is positioned with only one notch, the positioning can be performed with higher accuracy.

Here, if the plurality of cutout portions 4422a to 4422c (and the plurality of protrusion portions 4421a to 4421c) are arranged at the same intervals in the circumferential direction, the design C identifies the base member 4421 during assembly. There is a case that the position is shifted in the circumferential direction (rotational direction). Specifically, when the first cutout portion 4422a is engaged with the second projection portion 4421b, the second cutout portion 4422b is engaged with the third projection portion 4421c and the third cutout portion 4422c is moved into the first cutout portion 4422c. The first protrusion 4421a is engaged. In this case, even if all the cutouts 4422a to 4422c are engaged with all the projections 4421a to 4421c, the pattern C (reel sheet 4422) is displaced from the specific position by 120°.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121, the distance L1c from the first notch portion 4422a to the second notch portion 4422b is the distance from the second notch portion 4422b to the third notch portion 4422c. To a distance L2c up to. In this case, if notches (for example, the first notches 4422a corresponding to the first protrusions 4421a) corresponding to the protrusions are not engaged, all the notches 4422a to 4422c are not included in the protrusions 4421a to 4422a. Cannot engage 4421c. For example, if the second notch 4422b is to be engaged with the first protrusion 4421a, the positions of the other notches 4422a and 4422c in the circumferential direction shift with respect to the other protrusions 4421b and 4421c. It becomes impossible.

As described above, the reel sheet 4422 according to the present embodiment has a pattern in which all the cutouts 4422a to 4422c can be engaged with all the projections 4421a to 4421c even if the reel seat 4422 includes the plurality of cutouts 4422a to 4422c. Can be one. Accordingly, the reel sheet 4422 can be moved to a specific position of the base member 4421 only by engaging the first notch portion 4422a to the third notch portion 4422c with the first protruding portion 4421a to the third protruding portion 4421c. Can be placed accurately. According to this, after the reel sheet 4422 is attached to the base member 4421, it is not necessary to realign the attachment position of the reel sheet 4422 with respect to the base member 4421.

The holding portion 4423c according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the holding member according to the present invention.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine, but it is not limited to this and may be a slot machine or the like.

Further, although the reel sheet 4422 is configured such that the end portions in the circumferential direction thereof overlap in the radial direction, the present invention is not limited to this. The reel sheet 4422 is not limited to only the end portion, and at least a part of the reel sheet 4422 may overlap in the radial direction. Further, in the present embodiment, the entire end portion of the reel sheet 4422 is overlapped (from the left end to the right end of the circumferential end portion), but only a part of the end portion may be overlapped. The state in which the ends of the reel sheets 4422 overlap as described above is also included in “partially overlapping the ends of the reel sheets”.

Further, although the holding portion 4423c is formed on the left side mounting member 4423, the member on which the holding portion 4423c is formed is not limited to the left side mounting member 4423. The pressing portion 4423c may be formed on the base member 4421 or the right side mounting member 4424, for example. Further, the pressing portion 4423c may be configured by a predetermined member (a member different from the left mounting member 4423) fixed to the opening 4421f of the base member 4421.

Further, the pressing portion 4423c can be configured to press the left end portion and the right end portion of the overlapping portion 4422d, respectively. In such a case, the holding portion 4423c is formed on the left side mounting member 4423 and the right side mounting member 4424, for example. With this configuration, the overlapping portion 4422d can be pressed at the left end portion and the right end portion of the overlapping portion 4422d. As a result, the deformation of the overlapping portion 4422d can be reliably prevented. Note that the right attachment member 4424 may press the overlapping portion 4422d with the claw portion 4424b. In this case, the claw portion 4424b functions as a pressing member.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of protrusions and cutouts is three, but the number of protrusions and cutouts is not limited to this, and may be one or four or more, for example. Good. However, from the viewpoint that the positioning accuracy can be improved, it is preferable that the number of protrusions and notches is three or more.

The three protrusions 4421a to 4421c and the three notches 4422a to 4422c may be arranged at the same intervals in the rotation direction of the drum body 4420.

Further, the three cutout portions 4422a to 4422c are formed at the left end portion of the reel seat 4422 (arranged so as to be aligned in the left-right direction), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left and right portions may be mutually separated. It may be offset in the direction.

Further, the reel seat 4422 may be configured to engage with the base member 4421 and the right side mounting member 4424, respectively. In such a case, the reel sheet 4422 is formed with, for example, three notches at the left end and the right end thereof, respectively. The right mounting member 4424 includes three protrusions that can engage with the notches on the right side of the reel seat 4422. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the reel sheet 4422 from rotating relative to the base member 4421 at the left end portion and the right end portion of the reel seat 4422. Thereby, relative rotation of the reel seat 4422 with respect to the base member 4421 can be reliably prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reel sheet 4422 is provided with the plurality of cutout portions 4422a to 4422c, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the reel sheet 4422 may be provided with a plurality of projection portions. Good. In this case, the base member 4421 has a cutout portion that can engage with the plurality of protrusions.

Further, although the reel sheet 4422 uses the three cutout portions 4422a to 4422c as a guide for the mounting position, the guideline for the mounting position is not limited to the cutout portion, and a plurality of printed sheets on the outer peripheral surface of the reel sheet 4422 may be used. May be a mark of.

The base member 4421 is made of a transparent resin material as a whole, but the present invention is not limited to this. The base member 4421 should just be able to visually recognize the design C from the outside. That is, at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of the base member 4421 may be transparent. Specifically, for example, the base member 4421 may have a half of the outer peripheral surface formed of a transparent resin material.

Next, the overall configuration of the game ball distribution device 5400 shown in FIGS. 126 to 128 will be described.

The game ball distribution device 5400 is for distributing the game ball A (see FIG. 131) to a plurality of passages. The game ball distribution device 5400 includes a base member 5410, a rotation distribution mechanism 5420, a plate-shaped member 5430, a clune 5440, a guide member 5450, a holding member 5460, and a sensor group 5470.

The base member 5410 is a member for guiding the game ball A inside the game ball sorting device 5400. The base member 5410 is formed in a substantially box shape with the rear side surface opened. The right portion of the base member 5410 projects upward more than the other portions. The base member 5410 includes an inflow port 5411, an introduction path 5412, a left guide path 5413, a right guide path 5414, an installation space 5415, and an opening 5416.

The inflow port 5411 is a hole (inlet) for entering the game ball A. The inflow port 5411 is formed at the upper right end portion (protruding portion) of the base member 5410. The inflow port 5411 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. The inflow port 5411 is formed so that the game ball A can enter the ball. The inflow port 5411 is arranged below the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The inflow port 5411 is configured so that the game ball A can enter from above.

As shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the introduction path 5412 is a path for guiding the game ball A entering the inflow port 5411 downward. The introduction path 5412 is formed so as to extend downward from the inflow port 5411.

The left guide path 5413 is a path for guiding the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the lower left. The left guide path 5413 is formed so as to extend leftward and downward from the lower end of the introduction path 5412.

The right guide path 5414 is a path for guiding the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the lower right. The right guide path 5414 is formed so as to extend rightward and downward from the lower end portion of the introduction path 5412, and the extended end portion is formed so as to extend downward. The right guide portion is formed from the upper and lower middle portions of the base member 5410 to the lower end portion. The right guide path 5414 includes a guide portion 5414a.

The guide portion 5414a is for guiding the game ball A guided to the lower end portion of the right guide path 5414 in the rearward direction. The guide portion 5414a is formed at the lower end portion of the right guide path 5414 and is formed in a substantially arc shape in side view.

The installation space 5415 is an internal space of the base member 5410 in which the klune 5440 and the like described later are provided. The installation space 5415 is formed from the middle of the left and right of the base member 5410 (to the left of the left guide path 5413) to the left end. The right end of the installation space 5415 communicates with the left guide path 5413.

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 129, the opening 5416 is a hole (inlet for inspection) for letting the game ball A enter at the time of an inspection described later. The opening 5416 is formed at the upper end of the front side surface of the base member 5410 and penetrates the base member 5410 in the front-rear direction. The opening 5416 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view. The opening 5416 is formed from the middle of the left and right of the base member 5410 (to the left of the left guide path 5413) to the vicinity of the left end. The opening 5416 communicates with the upper end of the installation space 5415. The opening portion 5416 is formed such that its vertical width is a width that allows the game ball A to enter, and the entire area thereof allows the game ball A to enter from the front direction. The opening 5416 is closed by the glass door 13 when the player plays the game, and the game ball A cannot be entered.

As shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 is for distributing the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the left guide path 5413 or the right guide path 5414. The rotation distribution mechanism 5420 is provided at the lower end of the introduction path 5412. The rotation distribution mechanism 5420 includes a rotating body 5421, a pin 5422, a metal plate 5423, and a magnet 5424.

The rotating body 5421 is formed in a substantially inverted T shape in rear view, having a portion extending in the left-right direction and a portion extending in the upward direction. As shown in FIG. 129, the rotating body 5421 includes a base portion 5421a, a protrusion portion 5421b, a left side receiving portion 5421c, and a right side receiving portion 5421d.

The base portion 5421a is a portion that extends in the left-right direction of the rotating body 5421. The base portion 5421a is formed so that the width in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the width in the left-right direction of the introduction path 5412.

The protruding portion 5421b is a portion that extends upward in the rotating body 5421. The protruding portion 5421b is formed so as to extend from the left and right central portions of the base portion 5421a.

The left side receiving portion 5421c is a portion that receives the game ball A in the left portion of the rotating body 5421. The left side receiving portion 5421c is formed by the left portion of the upper side surface of the base portion 5421a and the left side surface of the protruding portion 5421b.

The right side receiving portion 5421d is a portion that receives the game ball A in the right portion of the rotating body 5421. The right side receiving portion 5421d is formed by the right portion of the upper side surface of the base portion 5421a and the right side surface of the protruding portion 5421b.

The pin 5422 is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The pin 5422 is inserted into the base portion 5421a of the rotating body 5421. Further, the pin 5422 has its front end fixed to the base member 5410 and its rear end fixed to a plate-shaped member 5430 (see FIG. 128) described later. Accordingly, the pin 5422 supports the rotating body 5421 so as to be rotatable relative to the base member 5410.

The sheet metal 5423 is a plate-shaped member fixed to the rear side surface of the base portion 5421a of the rotating body 5421. The sheet metal 5423 is formed such that its left end portion and right end portion are larger than other portions. The sheet metal 5423 is made of a magnetic material such as iron that is attracted by magnetic force.

The magnet 5424 shown in FIG. 128 is formed in a substantially disc shape. The magnet 5424 is fixed to a pressing member 5460, which will be described later, and is arranged behind the metal plate 5423. The magnet 5424 attracts the left end of the sheet metal 5423, and holds the rotating body 5421 with the right side receiving portion 5421d facing upward and the left side receiving portion 5421c facing left as shown in FIG. 129.

A cutout portion (not shown) extending in the left-right direction is formed on the lower side surface of the rotating body 5421 of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420. A protrusion (not shown) formed on the base member 5410 is arranged inside the cutout. The rotating body 5421 is regulated from rotating beyond a predetermined angle range by appropriately contacting the protruding portion with the cutout portion. The predetermined angle range is a range from the state where the right side receiving portion 5421d faces upward to the state where the left side receiving portion 5421c faces upward (the state shown in FIG. 133). The rotator 5421 can rotate in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear, from the state in which the right side receiving portion 5421d faces upward to the state in which the left side receiving portion 5421c faces upward. Further, the rotating body 5421 can rotate clockwise in rear view from the state in which the left side receiving portion 5421c faces upward to the state in which the right side receiving portion 5421d faces upward.

The rotation distribution mechanism 5420 configured in this manner causes the rotating body 5421 to rotate in an appropriate direction so that the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 is moved to the left guide path 5413 or the right guide path 5414. Distribute. The distribution operation of the game ball A by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIGS. 126 to 128, the plate member 5430 is for closing the right rear portion of the base member 5410. The plate-shaped member 5430 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view. The plate-shaped member 5430 is formed such that its vertical width and horizontal width are wider than the vertical width and horizontal width of the base member 5410. The plate member 5430 includes a left through hole 5431 and a right through hole 5432.

The left through hole 5431 is a hole that penetrates the plate surface in the front-rear direction in the left portion of the plate member 5430. The left through hole 5431 is formed so as to have substantially the same shape as the installation space 5415 in a front view.

The right through hole 5432 is a hole that penetrates the plate surface in the front-rear direction in the lower right part of the plate member 5430. The right through hole 5432 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a front view. The right through hole 5432 is formed so that the game ball A can pass therethrough.

The plate-shaped member 5430 is arranged behind the base member 5410 and is fixed to the base member 5410 with a screw. As a result, the left through hole 5431 communicates with the installation space 5415. The right through hole 5432 communicates with the lower end of the right guide path 5414.

As shown in FIGS. 127 to 129, the clune 5440 is a dish-shaped member for distributing the game balls A. The clune 5440 is formed in a substantially circular shape in a plan view, and the game ball A is rollable on the upper surface thereof. In addition, the upper surface of the clin 5440 is formed in a shape that gradually inclines downward toward the center thereof. That is, the upper surface of the clune 5440 is formed in a shape capable of guiding the game ball A to the central portion. The clune 5440 includes a connecting portion 5441, a first starting port 5442, out ports 5443 and 5444, and a protruding portion 5445.

The connection portion 5441 is a portion formed to extend rightward from the front end portion of the upper side surface of the clune 5440 (a portion having a substantially circular shape in plan view). The connecting portion 5441 is configured such that the game ball A can enter from the right end portion thereof. Further, the connecting portion 5441 is configured to be able to guide the game ball A to the left.

The first starting port 5442 is a hole formed in the front part of the clin 5440 and having a substantially circular shape in a plan view. The first starting port 5442 penetrates the clin 5440 in the vertical direction. The first starting port 5442 has an inner diameter that allows the game ball A to enter.

The out port 5443 is a hole that is formed in the left rear portion of the klune 5440 (left rear of the first starting port 5442) and has a substantially circular shape in a plan view. The out port 5444 is a hole having a substantially circular shape in a plan view, which is formed in the right rear portion of the clin 5440 (to the right of the out port 5443). The out ports 5443 and 5444 are formed to have substantially the same shape as the first starting port 5442.

The projecting portion 5445 is a substantially triangular pyramid-shaped portion formed in the center of the clune 5440. The projecting portion 5445 is formed to project upward from the upper side surface of the clune 5440. The projecting portion 5445 allows the game ball A to be inserted into the first starting port 5442 or the out ports 5443 and 5444 by appropriately playing the game ball A guided by the clune 5440. As a result, the game ball A guided by the clune 5440 can be distributed to the first starting port 5442 or the out ports 5443 and 5444.

The clune 5440 thus configured is fixed to the plate-shaped member 5430 with screws. The front end of the clune 5440 projects forward from the left through hole 5431 and is arranged above the installation space 5415. The connecting portion 5441 is configured such that the right end thereof is connected to the lower left end of the left guide path 5413 and the game ball A guided to the lower left end of the left guide path 5413 can be guided leftward. Further, the clune 5440 is arranged below and below the opening 5416. As a result, the first starting port 5442 and the out ports 5443 and 5444 are configured so that the game ball A can be directly inserted from the opening 5416 in the inspection described later (see FIG. 134).

As shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the guide member 5450 is a member for guiding the game ball A that has entered the first starting port 5442 or the out ports 5443 and 5444 to the pressing member 5460 described below. The guide member 5450 is formed in a shape such that the upper side surface of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped member is appropriately depressed downward. The guide member 5450 is formed such that the left-right width thereof is substantially the same as the left-right width of the clune 5440. The guide member 5450 includes a protrusion portion 5451, a mounting portion 5452, a front guide passage 5453, and a rear guide passage 5454.

The protruding portion 5451 is a portion protruding rearward from the left rear end portion of the upper side surface of the guide member 5450. The protrusion 5451 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape.

The mounting portion 5452 is a recess formed in the front end portion of the upper side surface of the guide member 5450. The mounting portion 5452 has a side wall and a bottom surface which are formed in a substantially U shape in a plan view. A first starting port switch 5472 described below is attached to the attachment portion 5452.

The front guide path 5453 is a recess formed on the upper side surface of the guide member 5450, and is a passage for guiding the game ball A entering the first starting port 5442 to the holding member 5460. The front guide path 5453 is formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view such that the extended end portion extends rightward and the extended end portion extends rearward. The front part of the front guide path 5453 is arranged below the mounting part 5452.

The rear side guide passage 5454 is a recess formed in the rear portion of the upper side surface of the guide member 5450, and is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the out ports 5443 and 5444 to the holding member 5460. The rear guide path 5454 is formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view such that the rear end extends in the right direction and the extended end portion extends in the rear direction. The rear guide path 5454 is formed between the protruding portion 5451 and the mounting portion 5452. The rear guide passage 5454 is formed so as not to communicate with the front guide passage 5453.

The guide member 5450 configured as described above is fixed to the lower portion of the clune 5440 with screws. The guide member 5450 is fixed to the plate-shaped member 5430 via the clune 5440, and is arranged below the installation space 5415. The attachment portion 5452 and the front guide path 5453 are arranged below the first starting port 5442 of the klune 5440, and are connected to the left side guide path 5413 of the base member 5410 via the first starting port 5442. Further, the rear side guide passage 5454 has its left end portion and right front end portion arranged below the out ports 5443 and 5444, and is connected to the left side guide passage 5413 through the out ports 5443 and 5444.

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 130, the pressing member 5460 is a member for pressing the plate-shaped member 5430 from the rear side. The pressing member 5460 is formed in a shape capable of closing the left through hole 5431 and the right through hole 5432 of the plate member 5430 from the rear direction. The pressing member 5460 is formed in such a shape that its front side surface is appropriately recessed rearward. The pressing member 5460 includes a mounting portion 5461, a right side discharge passage 5462, a front side discharge passage 5463, and a rear side discharge passage 5464.

The mounting portion 5461 is a recess formed in the upper left portion of the front surface of the pressing member 5460. The mounting portion 5461 is formed in a generally arcuate shape in a plan view so as to follow the shape of the rear portion of the clune 5440. The mounting portion 5461 is formed from the left end portion of the pressing member 5460 to the middle of the left and right portions. The mounting portion 5461 is recessed downward from the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower side surface thereof to the middle of the left and right portions with respect to other portions.

The right side discharge path 5462 is a path for discharging the game ball A that has passed through the right side through hole 5432 of the plate-shaped member 5430 to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400. The right side discharge passage 5462 is formed in a shape that extends rearward and the lower side surface of the extended end portion is open to the outside. The right discharge path 5462 is formed at the right end of the front side surface of the pressing member 5460.

The front side discharge path 5463 is a recess formed in the lower part of the front side surface of the pressing member 5460, and the game ball A guided to the rear end portion of the front side guide path 5453 of the guide member 5450 of the game ball distribution device 5400. It is a passage for discharging to the outside. The front discharge path 5463 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The front discharge path 5463 is formed below the mounting portion 5461 and to the left of the right discharge path 5462. The front side discharge path 5463 is formed so as to extend downward from the lower portion of the mounting portion 5461 to the lower end portion of the pressing member 5460.

The rear side discharge path 5464 is a recess formed in the lower left part of the front side surface of the pressing member 5460, and distributes the game ball A guided to the rear end of the rear side guide path 5454 of the guide member 5450. It is a passage for discharging to the outside of the device 5400. The rear discharge path 5464 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view. The rear discharge path 5464 is arranged below the mounting portion 5461 and to the left of the front discharge path 5463. The rear discharge path 5464 is formed so as to extend downward from below the mounting portion 5461 to the lower end portion of the pressing member 5460.

The pressing member 5460 thus configured is fixed to the rear side surface of the plate-shaped member 5430 with screws, and closes the left through hole 5431 and the right through hole 5432 (the front guide passage 5453 and the rear guide passage 5454) from the rear side. To do. The rear portion of the clin 5440 is mounted on the mounting portion 5461. Further, the protruding portion 5451 of the guide member 5450 is placed in the portion that is recessed downward in the placing portion 5461. The front end portion of the right discharge path 5462 is connected to the right through hole 5432. The upper end of the front discharge path 5463 is connected to the rear end of the front guide path 5453. The rear discharge path 5464 has its upper end connected to the rear end of the rear guide path 5454.

The sensor group 5470 is for detecting that the game ball A has entered the right guide path 5414, the front guide path 5453, and the rear guide path 5454. The sensor group 5470 includes an outlet switch 5471, a first starting port switch 5472, and an outlet switch 5473.

The outlet switch 5471 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the right guide path 5414. The out-port switch 5471 is formed in a flat plate shape with its plate surface facing the front-rear direction. The outlet switch 5471 has a through hole 5471a.

The through hole 5471a is a hole that is substantially circular in a front view and penetrates the out switch 5471 in the front-rear direction. The through hole 5471a has an inner diameter such that the game ball A can pass through. The through hole 5471a is formed in the lower portion of the out switch 5471.

The out-port switch 5471 configured as described above is attached to the right front end portion of the pressing member 5460. As a result, the through hole 5471a is arranged behind the right through hole 5432 of the plate member 5430. The outlet switch 5471 is configured, for example, to form a magnetic field in the through hole 5471a and detect an eddy current generated when the game ball A passes through the magnetic field (through hole 5471a). The outlet switch 5471 detects that the game ball A has entered the right guide path 5414 based on the detection result of the eddy current.

The first starting port switch 5472 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the front guide path 5453. The first starting port switch 5472 is configured in the same manner as the out port switch 5471, except that the first starting port switch 5472 is arranged with its plate surface facing up and down and that it is mounted on the mounting portion 5452 of the guide member 5450. The through hole 5472a is arranged between the first starting port 5442 and the front guide path 5453.

The outlet switch 5473 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the rear guide path 5454. The out-port switch 5473 is configured similarly to the first start-port switch 5472 except that it is attached below the mounting portion 5461 of the pressing member 5460. The through hole 5473a is arranged below the rear discharge path 5464.

As shown in FIG. 129 and FIG. 130, the game ball distribution device 5400 configured as described above has the first passage 5501 and the second passage 5502 as the passages for distributing the game balls A flowing in from the inflow port 5411. To have.

The first starting port and the second starting port may be provided integrally with the game ball distribution device 5400. In that case, for example, the above-mentioned outlet switch 5471 is configured as a first startup port switch, and the first startup port switch 5472 is configured as a second startup port switch. Further, a sensor may be provided at the outlet and used as the V area at a specific timing.

The first passage 5501 is a passage for guiding the game ball A distributed to the left guide path 5413 by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420. The first passage 5501 includes a left guide passage 5413 of the base member 5410, a connecting portion 5441 of the klune 5440, a first starting opening 5442 and an outlet 5443/5444, a front guide passage 5453 and a rear guide passage 5454 of the guide member 5450, In addition, the pressing member 5460 includes a front discharge path 5463 and a rear discharge path 5464. First passage 5501 branches into two passages at clune 5440. The first passage 5501 includes a third passage 5503 and a fourth passage 5504 as the branched passages.

The third passage 5503 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the first starting port 5442 of the clune 5440. The third passage 5503 is constituted by the first starting port 5442 of the clune 5440, the front guide passage 5453 of the guide member 5450, and the front discharge passage 5463 of the pressing member 5460.

The fourth passage 5504 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the out ports 5443 and 5444 of the clune 5440. The fourth passage 5504 is constituted by the outlets 5443 and 5444 of the clune 5440, the rear guide passage 5454 of the guide member 5450, and the rear discharge passage 5464 of the pressing member 5460.

The second passage 5502 is a passage for guiding the game ball A distributed to the right guide path 5414 by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420. The second passage 5502 is constituted by the right guide passage 5414 of the base member 5410, the right through hole 5432 of the plate member 5430 (see FIG. 128), and the right discharge passage 5462 of the holding member 5460.

Next, an operation mode of the game ball distribution device 5400 will be described. In the following, as shown in FIG. 131, it is assumed that the game ball A is entered from the inflow port 5411 with the right side receiving portion 5421d of the rotating body 5421 facing upward.

First, the game ball A that has entered the inflow port 5411 is guided downward by the introduction path 5412 and collides with the right side receiving portion 5421d of the rotating body 5421 of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420. As a result, the rotating body 5421 and the sheet metal 5423 rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the rear. By the rotation, the rotating body 5421 guides the game ball A in the lower right direction and distributes it to the second passage 5502 (right guide passage 5414). The sheet metal 5423 is attracted to the magnet 5424 (see FIG. 128) at its right end when the left-side receiving portion 5421c is rotated upward. As a result, the rotating body 5421 is held by the magnet 5424 with the left side receiving portion 5421c facing upward (see FIG. 133).

The game ball A (hereinafter, referred to as “game ball A2”) distributed to the second passage 5502 is guided downward in the right guide path 5414 and then guided backward by the guide portion 5414a. The game ball A2 passes through the right side through hole 5432 (see FIG. 127) of the plate member 5430 in the rear direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 132, the game ball A2 is guided to the front end portion of the right side discharge path 5462 of the pressing member 5460. At this time, the game ball A2 passes rearward through the through hole 5471a of the outlet switch 5471. As a result, the outlet switch 5471 detects that the game ball A2 has been distributed to the second passage 5502 (right guide passage 5414). The game ball A2 that has passed through the through hole 5471a is guided rearward through the right side discharge path 5462 and discharged to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400.

Thus, in the second passage 5502, the right guide passage 5414, the right through hole 5432, and the right discharge passage 5462 are arranged in order from the upstream side. Further, the second passage 5502 is arranged on the downstream side of the rotary distribution mechanism 5420, and an out-port switch 5471 is provided in the middle thereof.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 133, when the game ball A enters the inlet 5411 of the base member 5410 in a state where the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward, the game ball A is left side of the rotating body 5421. It collides with the receiving portion 5421c. As a result, the rotating body 5421 and the sheet metal 5423 rotate clockwise in the rear view. By the rotation, the rotating body 5421 guides the game ball A in the lower left direction and distributes it to the first passage 5501 (left guide passage 5413). Note that the sheet metal 5423 is attracted to the magnet 5424 (see FIG. 128) at its left end when the right side receiving portion 5421d rotates upward. As a result, the rotating body 5421 is held by the magnet 5424 with the right side receiving portion 5421d facing upward (see FIG. 131).

The game ball A sorted to the first passage 5501 is guided to the lower left direction on the left guide path 5413, and then is guided to the vicinity of the first starting port 5442 through the connecting portion 5441 of the clune 5440. The game ball A is guided in the clockwise direction in plan view on the upper surface of the clin 5440, and is gradually guided to the central portion of the clin 5440. At this time, the protrusion 5445 of the clune 5440 appropriately hits the game ball A. Thereby, the clune 5440 inserts the game ball A into either the first starting port 5442 or the out port 5443/5444. In this way, the clune 5440 distributes the game ball A to the third passage 5503 or the fourth passage 5504.

As described above, in the first passage 5501, the left guide passage 5413, the connecting portion 5441, the upper surface of the clune 5440 (a substantially circular portion in plan view), the third passage 5503, and the fourth passage 5501 are arranged in this order from the upstream side. A passage 5504 is arranged. The opening portion 5416 is formed so as to open to the upper side surfaces of the connection portion 5441 and the clune 5440. That is, the opening portion 5416 is provided at the same position as the upper side surface of the connecting portion 5441 and the clune 5440 (downstream of the left guide passage 5413 and upstream of the third passage 5503 and the fourth passage 5504). Further, the first passage 5501 is arranged on the downstream side of the rotary distribution mechanism 5420.

As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the game ball A (hereinafter, referred to as “game ball A3”) distributed to the third passage 5503 (entered in the first starting opening 5442) is first started. It passes through the through hole 5472a of the mouth switch 5472 in the downward direction. As a result, the first starting opening switch 5472 detects that the game ball A3 has been distributed to the third passage 5503 (front side guide passage 5453). The game ball A3 that has passed through the through hole 5472a is guided to the left front end of the front guide path 5453. Then, the game ball A3 is guided to the right in the front guide path 5453 and then to the rear direction, and is guided to the upper end portion of the front discharge path 5463. The game ball A3 is guided downward in the front discharge path 5463 and discharged to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400.

In this way, in the third passage 5503, the first starting port 5442, the front guide passage 5453, and the front discharge passage 5463 are arranged in order from the upstream side. Further, the third passage 5503 is provided with a first starting port switch 5472 in the middle thereof.

On the other hand, the game ball A (hereinafter, referred to as “game ball A4”) distributed to the fourth passage 5504 (entered in the outlets 5443 and 5444) is guided to the left front end portion of the rear guide path 5454. To be done. Then, the game ball A4 is guided to the right in the rear guide path 5454 and then to the rear direction, and is guided to the upper end portion of the rear discharge path 5464. The game ball A4 is guided downward in the rear discharge path 5464 and is discharged to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400. At this time, the game ball A4 passes through the through hole 5473a of the outlet switch 5473 in the downward direction. As a result, the outlet switch 5473 detects that the game ball A4 has been distributed to the fourth passage 5504 (rear side guide passage 5454).

Thus, in the fourth passage 5504, the outlets 5443 and 5444, the rear guide passage 5454, and the rear discharge passage 5464 are arranged in this order from the upstream side. The fourth passage 5504 is provided with an outlet switch 5473 in the middle thereof.

As described above, the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 sequentially distributes the game ball A to the first passage 5501 or the second passage 5502 (with a probability of ½). Further, the clune 5440 distributes the game ball A distributed to the first passage 5501 to the third passage 5503 with a one-third probability and to the fourth passage 5504 with a two-third probability. .. That is, the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 and the clune 5440 distribute the game ball A, which has entered the inflow port 5411, to the third passage 5503 with a probability of 1/6 and the fourth with a probability of 2/6. Allocate to passage 5504.

Here, the game ball distribution device 5400 is inspected at the time of manufacturing or maintenance at the hall. In the inspection, the glass door 13 is opened, the game ball A is directly inserted into the game ball sorting device 5400, and the flow of the game ball A and the operation of the out port switch 5471 and the like are confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 131, when inspecting the second passage 5502, the game ball A is inserted from the inflow port 5411 of the base member 5410. At this time, the game ball A is distributed by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 to the second passage 5502 with a probability of ½. In the inspection, the flow of the game balls A2 distributed to the second passage 5502 is confirmed. Further, by checking whether or not the outlet switch 5471 detects that the game ball A2 has passed through the through hole 5471a, the operation of the outlet switch 5471 is confirmed (see FIG. 132).

Further, as shown in FIG. 134, when inspecting the first passage 5501, the game balls A3 and A4 are inserted into the clune 5440 from the opening 5416 of the base member 5410. Thus, in the inspection, the opening 5416 is provided from the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400 to the distribution destination (the first passage 5501, the clune 5440 in the present embodiment) of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 for the game balls A3 and A4. Can enter. The first passage 5501 is inspected by inspecting the third passage 5503 and the fourth passage 5504 with such game balls A3 and A4.

As shown in FIGS. 132 and 134, when inspecting the third passage 5503, the game ball A3 is directly inserted from the opening 5416 to the first starting port 5442. As a result, the game ball A3 is directly inserted into the third passage 5503 without being sorted by the clune 5440. In the inspection, the flow of the game ball A3 entered in such a third passage 5503 is confirmed. Further, the operation of the first starting port switch 5472 is confirmed by checking whether or not the first starting port switch 5472 has detected that the game ball A3 has passed through the through hole 5472a (see FIG. 128). .. In this way, the first starting opening switch 5472 can detect the game ball A3 entered through the opening 5416 in the inspection, and thus can be said to be located on the downstream side of the opening 5416.

When inspecting the fourth passage 5504, the game ball A4 is directly inserted from the opening 5416 to the outlets 5443 and 5444. As a result, the game ball A4 is directly entered into the fourth passage 5504 without being sorted by the clune 5440. In the inspection, the flow of the game ball A4 that has entered the fourth passage 5504 is confirmed. Further, by checking whether or not the outlet switch 5473 has detected that the game ball A4 has passed through the through hole 5473a, the operation of the outlet switch 5473 is confirmed. In this way, the outlet switch 5473 can detect the game ball A4 entered through the opening 5416 in the inspection, and thus can be said to be on the downstream side of the opening 5416.

According to the game ball distribution device 5400 according to the present embodiment, the game balls A3 and A4 can be inserted into the clune 5440 through the opening 5416. As a result, the game balls A3 and A4 can be directly introduced into the first passage 5501 without being distributed by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420. Therefore, when inspecting the first passage 5501, all the game balls A3 and A4 can be put into the first passage 5501 (the second passage 5502 has a probability of ½ by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420). Cannot be assigned to). Accordingly, the inspection of the first passage 5501 can be efficiently performed.

In addition, the game ball sorting device 5400 can directly insert the game ball A3 into the first starting opening 5442 of the cluone 5440 from the opening 5416. According to this, the game ball A3 can be directly inserted into the third passage 5503 without being sorted by the clune 5440. Thereby, when inspecting the third passage 5503, all the game balls A3 can enter the third passage 5503 (the clune 5440 cannot distribute the game ball A3 to the fourth passage 5504 with a probability of 2/3). Therefore, the inspection of the third passage 5503 can be performed efficiently.

Here, if the player tries to inspect the third passage 5503 by inserting the game ball A from the inflow port 5411, the game ball A is distributed by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 and the clune 5440, and is 1/6. The game ball A can be entered into the third passage 5503 only with a probability. On the other hand, the game ball sorting device 5400 according to the present embodiment can enter the game ball A3 into the third passage 5503 with a probability of 100%. According to this, it is possible to efficiently inspect the third passage 5503, which has the lowest probability of being distributed.

In addition, the game ball distribution device 5400 can directly insert the game ball A4 from the opening 5416 into the outlets 5443 and 5444. According to this, the game ball A4 can be directly inserted into the fourth passage 5504 without being sorted by the clune 5440. Thereby, when inspecting the fourth passage 5504, all the game balls A4 can enter the fourth passage 5504 (the clune 5440 cannot distribute to the third passage 5503 with a probability of 1/3). Therefore, the fourth passage 5504 can be efficiently inspected.

As described above, the gaming ball distribution device 5400 according to the present embodiment uses the first passage 5501 (the third passage 5503 and the fourth passage 5504) without being distributed to the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 and the clune 5440. Can be inspected. According to this, it is possible to efficiently inspect the game ball distribution device 5400. Regarding the inspection of the second passage 5502, the game ball A is distributed by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 for the convenience of inserting the game ball A from the inflow port 5411, but one ball is reliable for every two balls. The ball can be entered into the second passage 5502. Therefore, the inspection of the game ball distribution device 5400 is not delayed significantly.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, the game ball distribution device 5400 according to the present embodiment includes two means for distributing the game balls A (including the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 and the clune 5440), but is not limited to this. Instead, it is sufficient if it has at least one means for distributing the game balls A.

Further, the game ball distribution device 5400 does not necessarily have to have different configurations of the means for distributing the game balls A (rotary distribution mechanism 5420 and clune 5440), and the means for distributing the game balls A have the same configuration. May be. Specifically, the game ball distribution device 5400 may be provided with two clune 5440 or two rotation distribution mechanism 5420.

Further, the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 distributes the game ball A to the first passage 5501 or the second passage 5502 (two passages), but it is not limited to this, and three or more passages are provided. Alternatively, the game ball A may be distributed.

Further, the clune 5440 distributes the game balls A to the third passage 5503 or the fourth passage 5504 (two passages), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game balls are provided to three or more passages. A may be assigned.

In addition, the base member 5410 may be provided with an opening through which the game ball A can be inserted at a lower right portion of the front side surface thereof (a position overlapping the right guide path 5414 in a front view). With this configuration, when inspecting the second passage 5502, the game ball A can be directly inserted into the second passage 5502 from the opening. Accordingly, the first passage 5501 and the second passage 5502 can be efficiently inspected. In this case, the openings 5416 and the openings formed in the lower right portion of the front side surface of the base member 5410 function as openings that can individually flow into the first passage 5501 and the second passage 5502. To do. Further, the outlet switch 5471 functions as a second detecting means capable of detecting the game ball A distributed to the second passage 5502.

Further, the opening portion 5416 has a shape large enough to allow the game ball A to directly enter the first starting opening 5442 and the out openings 5443 and 5444 of the clune 5440, but the shape of the opening portion 5416 is not limited to this. It is not something that will be done. The opening 5416 may have a shape that allows the game ball A to enter the upper surface of the clune 5440, and is small enough not to allow the game ball A to enter the first start port 5442 and the out ports 5443 and 5444, for example. It may have a shape. Specifically, the shape of the opening 5416 may be a substantially circular shape in a front view having an inner diameter substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball A.

Further, the configurations of the out-mouth switch 5471, the first starting-mouth switch 5472, and the out-mouth switch 5473 are not limited to the present embodiment, and the game ball A can be detected by an appropriate means.

As another embodiment of the game ball distribution device 5400, unlike the game ball distribution device 5400 described above (first embodiment), even if the positions of the first start port 5442 and the out ports 5443, 5444 are reversed. Good. By providing the inflow port of the first starting port 5442 on the back side of the clune 5440, it is possible to make it difficult to perform fraud through the opening 5416. Further, a passage provided with sensors (more specifically, a passage that guides the game ball flowing into the inflow port) is provided at the back of the clune 5640 (that is, disposed at a position far from the opening 5416), and the sensor is provided. A passage (passage for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port) not provided with the class may be arranged near the opening 5416. For example, the first inlet switch is provided at the inflow port on the back side (the out port 5443 according to the first embodiment), and the out port switch is provided at the inflow port on the other side (also, the out port 5444). No sensor is provided at the inflow port on the front side (similarly, the first starting port 5442). With such a structure, it is possible to prevent the sensor from being tampered with even if the opening 5416 is provided.

In addition, the production device (for example, the movable accessory unit 57) may execute the production based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the outlet switch 5473, or the type of the production to be executed is determined. May be. The extraction timing of the effect condition determination random number referred to when determining the effect type may be the passage timing of the out-door switch 5473, or the effect may be executed based on the number of passages of the out-out switch 5473 in a certain period. May be. Further, it is also possible to perform a hold ball display or a variable display of the decorative pattern based on the detection of the game ball by the out-port switch 5471. In this case, it is just a production and has nothing to do with the profit given to the player.

The main control circuit 100 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the specific game determination means according to the present invention.
The sub control circuit 200 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the effect control means according to the present invention.
In addition, the passage for guiding the game ball that has flown into the outlet 5443 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the first passage according to the present invention.
Further, the passage that guides the game balls that have circulated to the outlet 5444 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the second passage according to the present invention.
Further, the passage (third passage 5503) for guiding the game balls flowing into the first starting port 5442 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the third passage according to the present invention.
Further, the out port 5443 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the back-side inlet according to the present invention.
The out port 5444 according to the present embodiment is another embodiment of the inflow port on the far side according to the present invention.
Further, the first starting port 5442 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the front side inlet according to the present invention.
Further, the first starting opening switch according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the specific detection means according to the present invention.
The movable accessory unit 57 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the effect detection means according to the present invention.

Next, a game ball distribution device 5600 according to another embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 135.

As shown in FIG. 135, a game ball distribution device 5600 according to another embodiment is significantly different from the game ball distribution device 5400 according to the present embodiment in that it does not include a rotation distribution mechanism 5420. Note that, in FIG. 135, in order to make it easier to see the flow of the game ball A, the shape and direction of each member are schematically illustrated. A game ball distribution device 5600 according to another embodiment includes an inflow port 5611, an introduction path 5612, a clune 5640, a first starting port switch 5671, and a second starting port switch 5672.

The inflow port 5611 is configured so that the game ball A can enter from the front.

The introduction path 5612 is formed so as to extend in the front-rear direction. The introduction path 5612 is connected at its front end portion to the inflow port 5611, and is configured to be able to guide the game ball A entered from the inflow port 5611 in the backward direction.

The clune 5640 is connected to the rear end portion of the introduction path 5612. The game ball A guided through the introduction path 5612 enters the clune 5640. The clune 5640 includes a first starting port 5641, a second starting port 5642, an out port 5643, and the like.

The first starting port 5641 is a hole formed in the front right portion of the clin 5640 and having a substantially circular shape in plan view. The first starting port 5641 penetrates the clune 5640 in the vertical direction and has an inner diameter such that the game ball A can enter.

The second starting port 5642 is a hole formed in the left portion of the clin 5640 and having a substantially circular shape in a plan view. The second starting port 5642 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the first starting port 5641.

The out port 5643 is a hole that is formed in the right rear portion of the clune 5640 and has a substantially circular shape in a plan view. The out port 5643 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the first starting port 5641.

The clune 5640 configured as described above appropriately flips the game ball A guided from the introduction path 5612 with a projecting portion (not shown), so that the game ball A is first starting port 5641, second starting port 5642, or out. It can be distributed to any of the mouths 5643 (three passages).

The first starting opening switch 5671 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the first starting opening 5641. The first starting port switch 5671 is arranged in a first passage 5701 described later with its plate surface facing left and right. The first starting opening switch 5671 is configured to be able to detect that the game ball A has entered by the same method as the out opening switch 5471 according to the present embodiment.

The second starting port switch 5672 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the second starting port 5642. The second starting port switch 5672 is configured similarly to the first starting port switch 5671 except that it is arranged in the second passage 5702 described later.

The game ball sorting device 5600 configured as described above includes a first passage 5701, a second passage 5702, and a third passage 5703 as passages for guiding the game balls A sorted by the clune 5640.

The first passage 5701 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the first starting opening 5641. The first passage 5701 is formed so as to extend in the left-right direction. The left end of the first passage 5701 is arranged below the first starting port 5641 and is connected to the first starting port 5641.

The second passage 5702 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the second starting port 5642. The second passage 5702 is formed so as to extend in the left-right direction. The right end of the second passage 5702 is arranged below the second starting port 5642 and is connected to the second starting port 5642.

The third passage 5703 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the out port 5643. The third passage 5703 is formed so as to extend in the front-rear direction. A front end portion of the third passage 5703 is arranged below the out port 5643 and is connected to the out port 5643.

The game ball distribution device 5600 according to another embodiment has openings 5616 and 5617 as openings for entering the game ball A into the first passage 5701 and the second passage 5702 at the time of inspection. To have.

The opening 5616 is a hole for allowing the game ball A to enter the first passage 5701. The opening portion 5616 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. The opening 5616 is formed so that the game ball A can enter the ball. The opening 5616 is formed in the middle of the first passage 5701 on the left and right sides. The opening 5616 is closed by an appropriate closing means when the player plays a game.

The opening 5617 is a hole for allowing the game ball A to enter the second passage 5702. The opening 5617 is formed so as to have substantially the same shape as the opening 5616. The opening 5617 is formed in the middle of the second passage 5702 in the left and right directions. The opening 5617 is closed by an appropriate closing means when the player plays a game.

According to the game ball distribution device 5600 according to another embodiment, the first passage 5701 can be inspected by directly inserting the game ball A into the opening 5616 at the time of inspection. In addition, by directly entering the game ball into the opening 5617 at the time of inspection, the inspection of the second passage 5702 can be performed. As described above, the first passage 5701 and the second passage 5702 are provided with the opening portions 5616 and 5617 capable of separately entering the game ball A, so that the first starting port 5641 or the second starting port 5642 is formed. There is no need to aim and enter the game ball A. Therefore, it is possible to easily enter the game ball A into the first passage 5701 and the second passage 5702. According to this, the inspection of the first passage 5701 and the second passage 5702 can be efficiently performed.

Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachi-slot machine, a displacement member displaceable between a first position where a game ball can easily pass and a second position where a game ball can hardly pass with respect to a passage area. The technology of providing the is known. For example, it is as described in JP-A-2014-18304.

In this technique, a slide type attacker is provided as the displacement member. The slide-type attacker is configured to be movable so as to project from the game board toward the player. A linear solenoid is used as a drive source for moving the slide attacker. In this way, the slide attacker can move so as to project from the game board to the player side by using the driving force generated from the solenoid.

In the conventional pachinko machine, the solenoid is arranged on the back side of the slide attacker, and the moving direction of the plunger is the same as the moving direction of the slide attacker. With such a configuration, a large space is required in the depth direction of the pachinko machine.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be made compact in the depth direction.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention,
A game board 17 having a game area 20 in which a game ball rolls,
A special winning opening 540 (passage area) provided on the game board 17 through which game balls can pass,
A shutter 610 (displacement member) which is displaceable between a first position where a game ball can easily pass and a second position where a game ball can hardly pass with respect to the special winning opening 540 (passage region).
A special winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) for driving the shutter 610 (displacement member);
Guide paths 430 and 530 for guiding a game ball to the special winning opening 540 (passage area),
Equipped with
The special winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) causes the shutter 610 (displacement member) to move in a direction (horizontal direction) different from the direction (front-back direction) in which the shutter 610 (displacement member) moves from the first position to the second position. 610 (displacement member) is generated, and
A link arm 630 (driving direction converting means) for converting the direction of the force generated from the special winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) into a direction in which the force moves from the first position to the second position,
The special winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine rear side end portion of the link arm 630 (driving direction changing means).

With such a configuration, the driving direction of the special winning opening solenoid 620 is not the front-rear direction in which the shutter 610 slides but is the left-right direction, and the rear end portion of the special winning opening solenoid 620 is closer to the rear end portion of the link arm 630. Also, by arranging the attacker unit 500 in front, the depth of the attacker unit 500 can be reduced. Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the depth direction can be made compact.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1,
The special winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) is arranged below the link arm 630 (driving direction changing means).

With such a configuration, the special winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) and the link arm 630 (link mechanism) can have a two-story structure. That is, for example, the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be made compact as compared with the case where the special winning opening solenoid 620 and the link arm 630 are arranged side by side in the depth direction.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1
A first guide path 531 (second guide path) having a guide portion 611 (bottom surface portion) and a front side plate portion 520 (side wall portion) of the shutter 610 is provided,
The shutter 610 (displacement member) is displaced to the second position by moving from the first position toward the front side plate portion 520 (side wall portion),
When the shutter 610 (displacement member) is displaced to the second position, a guide portion 611 (bottom surface portion) of the shutter 610 is formed,
When displaced to the second position, there is a gap between the guide portion 611 (bottom surface portion) and the front side plate portion 520 (side wall portion) in which a game ball cannot pass.

With such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the moving distance when the shutter 610 is opened and closed. Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the depth direction can be made compact.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachi-slot machine, a technique for allowing a large number of game balls to pass at a time with respect to a predetermined passing area is known. For example, it is as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-313481.

In the technique described in Patent Document 1, a plurality of game balls that have fallen on the game board can be stored, and a game ball container that can release the storage is provided. In such a configuration, when a plurality of game balls are stored in the game ball container and the storage is released, the game ball container is operated to move the plurality of stored game balls to a predetermined passage area. Can be passed through. That is, in the technique described in Patent Document 1, it is possible to pass a large number of game balls at once to a predetermined passing area.

In the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine, the game ball container is provided with a dedicated drive means and is operated by the drive means, which causes a high cost.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of passing a large number of gaming balls at a time with respect to a predetermined passing area without providing a dedicated drive means. With the goal.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention,
A game board 17 having a game area 20 in which a game ball rolls,
A special winning opening 540 (passage area) provided on the game board 17 through which game balls can pass,
A shutter 610 which is displaceable to the special winning opening 540 (passage area) into an open state (first mode) in which a game ball can easily pass and a closed state (second mode) in which a game ball cannot pass easily. (Displacement member),
A special winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) for driving the shutter 610 (displacement member);
Guide paths 430 and 530 capable of guiding a game ball to the special winning opening 540 (passage area),
Equipped with
The taxiways 430 and 530 are
A first guide path 531 (first guide path) having a speed reducing rib 534 (speed reducing means) capable of reducing the moving speed of the game ball;
A second guide path 532 (second guide path) for guiding the game ball to the upstream side of the first guide path 531 (first guide path),
And a second guide path 432 (third guide path) for guiding the game ball to the downstream side of the first guide path 531 (first guide path),
The second guide path 432 (third guide path), the game ball that has moved the first guide path 531 (first guide path), and the second guide path 432 (third guide path) The game ball that has moved is arranged at a position where it can collide.

With such a configuration, in the first guide path 531, the game balls guided through different guide paths can collide with each other. In this way, the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guide path 531 can be further reduced, and thus it becomes easier to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531. .. That is, it is possible to win (pass) a large number of game balls at once to the special winning opening 540 without providing a dedicated driving means.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1,
The second guide path 532 (second guide path) and the second guide path 432 (third guide path) are the second guide path when the shutter 610 (displacement member) is in the first mode. The game ball that has moved through the guide path 532 (second guide path) and the second guide path 432 (third guide path) is arranged at a position where it can flow into the special winning opening 540 (passage area). It is a thing.

With such a configuration, the game balls can be guided to the first guide path 531 (and thus the third guide path 533) of the attacker unit 500 by two routes, so that a relatively large number of game balls can be won in a short period of time. The mouth 540 can be awarded. That is, it is possible to quickly perform round digestion in the big hit game.

Here, conventionally, for example, in a pachinko machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as that a game ball has passed a starting region provided in a game region in which a shot game ball can be rolled, Display control means is provided for performing control to variably display a symbol as identification information on the display area, and controlling to derive and display the symbol that is variably displayed, and the symbol displayed and derived is a predetermined combination (specific In the display mode), a big hit game state advantageous to the player (so-called “big hit”) is provided.

In addition, in the pachinko machine, a technique of stacking and arranging a plurality of movable bodies on one surface side of a base member has been proposed (see JP-A-2015-202274). Specifically, the pachinko machine described in the document includes a movable effect device having a first movable body, a second movable body, and a third movable body arranged in front of the base member (on the player side). There is. The first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body are appropriately supported by the base member.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine, since the plurality of movable bodies are concentrated on one surface side of the base member, the center of gravity of the plurality of movable bodies is far from the base member. Therefore, a large moment of inertia is generated when the plurality of movable bodies operate. This may cause the plurality of movable bodies to swing, and the movable bodies may come into contact with each other.

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 (gaming machine) according to the present embodiment has a plate-shaped base member 1500 to which a plurality of movable bodies can be attached, and a first movable body 1600 (first Movable body), a pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 (second movable bodies) attached to the other surface side of the base member 1500, a first movable body 1600, and a pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 are controlled to move. The first movable body 1600 and the pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 are provided by the movement control means 1800, and by the movement control means 1800, a production position that is easily visible to the player and a standby position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. When the movement is controlled to the effect position, the first movable body 1600 is arranged closer to the player than the base member 1500, and the pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 are When the movement is controlled to a position, it is arranged on the inner side of the gaming machine with respect to the base member 1500.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies (the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700).
That is, since the center of gravity of the entire second movable accessory unit 82 is located inside or near the base member 1500, when the movable bodies (the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700) operate. The generated moment of inertia can be reduced, and swinging (vibration or the like) of the movable body (first movable body 1600 and second movable body 1700) can be suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies (the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700).

The first movable body 1600 is composed of a single movable body and is arranged in the center of the base member 1500. The pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 are a plurality of movable bodies (second movable body 1700). ), and is arranged as a pair of movable bodies at symmetrical positions.

With this configuration, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies (the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700).
That is, in the left-right direction, the center of gravity of the entire second movable accessory unit 82 is located at the left-right central portion of the second movable accessory unit 82 or at a portion close to it, so that the movable body (first movable body) It is possible to more effectively suppress the swing (vibration or the like) of the 1600 and the second movable body 1700). Further, while the center of gravity is located near the center of the left and right, various effects can be performed by the first movable body 1600 arranged in the center and the second movable body 1700 arranged in a pair on the left and right.

Further, here, conventionally, in a pachinko machine, for example, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as that a game ball has passed a starting region provided in a game region in which a shot game ball can be rolled, a display device is established. Display control means is provided for performing control to variably display the symbol as the identification information on the display area of, and control for deriving and displaying the symbol that is variably displayed, and the symbol displayed and derived is a predetermined combination ( There is provided a big hit game state (so-called “big hit”) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display mode is achieved.

Further, in a pachinko machine, a technique of driving a movable body by a driving means has been proposed (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-346103). Specifically, the pachinko machine described in the document can drive a sprocket (rotating body) by a drive motor (driving unit) and pay out game balls or the like as the sprocket rotates.

The drive motor has a plurality of fixed coils. The drive motor can rotate the sprocket by sequentially supplying a current to the plurality of coils to sequentially excite the coils. Further, the drive motor can keep the sprocket in a stopped state by continuing to flow current only in a predetermined phase among the plurality of coils.

However, in the above conventional pachinko machine, since it is necessary to maintain the excitation of the coil of the predetermined phase in order to hold the sprocket in a stopped state, power is wasted and the life of the drive motor is shortened. Was disadvantageous.

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a first movable body 1600 (movable body) that is controlled to move to a production position that is easily visible to the player and a standby position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. A pachinko gaming machine 1 including a movement control means 1800 capable of moving the movable body 1600, wherein the movement control means 1800 first moves a motor 1810 (driving means) and a driving force generated by the motor 1810. The driving force transmission mechanism 1820 for transmitting to the body 1600 is provided. The driving force transmission mechanism 1820 converts the rotational force generated by the second transmission gear 1823 (rotating body) and the second transmission gear 1823 into a linear force. A converting mechanism (arm 1824) for converting, and a reciprocating motion transmitting means (arm 1824) for transmitting a force in the linear direction generated by the converting mechanism as a force for vertically moving the first movable body 1600, The first movable body 1600 is controlled to move upward when the second transmission gear 1823 rotates clockwise in the front view (first direction) in the angular range Y (range of predetermined angle), and the second transmission gear 1600 is transmitted. The gear 1823 is controlled to move downward in the angle range Y by rotating in the counterclockwise direction (second direction) when viewed from the front, and the second transmission gear 1823 exceeds the angle range Y and rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. When the second transmission gear 1823 is rotated downward in the front view clockwise direction beyond the angular range Y, the angular range X (specific angle range) is exceeded and the clockwise rotation in the front view is performed. It is characterized in that a first elongated hole 1824b (movement restriction means) for restricting rotation in the direction is provided.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress waste of power.
That is, since the first movable body 1600 can be held at a predetermined position without supplying electric power to the motor 1810, waste of electric power can be suppressed. Further, this can prevent the life of the motor 1810 from being shortened.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is characterized in that the first movable body 1600 is controlled to move to the standby position by the arm 1824 when the rotation of the second transmission gear 1823 is restricted by the first elongated hole 1824b. It is what

With this configuration, the first movable body 1600 can be held at the standby position without wasting electric power.

Further, here, conventionally, in a pachinko machine, for example, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as that a game ball has passed a starting region provided in a game region in which a shot game ball can be rolled, a display device is established. Display control means is provided for performing control to variably display the symbol as the identification information on the display area of, and control for deriving and displaying the symbol that is variably displayed, and the symbol displayed and derived is a predetermined combination ( There is provided a big hit game state (so-called “big hit”) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display mode is achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine, a technique of stacking and arranging a plurality of movable bodies on one surface side of a base member has been proposed (see JP-A-2015-202274). Specifically, the pachinko machine described in the document includes a movable effect device having a first movable body, a second movable body, and a third movable body arranged in front of the base member (on the player side). There is. The first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body are appropriately supported by the base member.

The first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body can each move between an initial position (accommodation position) and a movement position (effect position). By moving each of the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body from the initial position to the movement position, it is possible to greatly expand the decorative portion and perform an appropriate effect. In addition, by moving the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body from the moving position to the initial position, the decorative portion can be made difficult to see by the player.

In the above conventional pachinko machine, when the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body of the movable performance device are in the initial positions, respectively, the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body are bases. The members are arranged in a stacked state on one surface side. Therefore, for example, when a strong impact is applied to the movable rendering device when the movable rendering device is transported, the movable bodies may come into contact with each other and be damaged.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a plate-shaped base member 1500 to which a plurality of movable bodies can be attached, and a first movable body 1600 (first movable body) attached to one surface side of the base member 1500. A second movable body 1700 (second movable body) attached to the other surface side of the base member 1500, and a movement control means 1800 for controlling movement of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700, The first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be moved and controlled by the movement control means 1800 to a presentation position that is easily visible to the player and a standby position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Is accommodated on the one surface side when the movement is controlled to the standby position, and the second movable body 1700 is accommodated on the other surface side when the movement is controlled to the standby position. Is.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies.
That is, in the state where the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are housed (at the standby position), the distance between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies.

Further, the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are arranged at positions where they cannot come into contact with each other by the base member 1500 when the movement is controlled to the standby position.

With this configuration, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies.
That is, since the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are partitioned by the base member 1500 in the state where the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are housed (at the standby position). The occurrence of contact between the movable bodies can be effectively suppressed.

Here, conventionally, for example, in a pachinko machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as that a game ball has passed a starting region provided in a game region in which a shot game ball can be rolled, Display control means is provided for performing control to variably display a symbol as identification information on the display area, and controlling to derive and display the symbol that is variably displayed, and the symbol displayed and derived is a predetermined combination (specific In the display mode), a big hit game state advantageous to the player (so-called “big hit”) is provided.

Further, in a pachinko machine, a technique has been proposed in which a flat cable is sandwiched between wiring guides so that the flat cable does not easily come off from the connector (see JP 2011-104294 A). Specifically, the wiring guide sandwiches the flat portion of the flat cable with other members. As a result, the wiring guide can restrict movement and bending of the flat cable in a direction perpendicular to the flat surface portion, and thus prevent the flat cable from easily coming off the connector.

However, in the conventional pachinko machine, although the flat cable can be restricted from moving in a direction perpendicular to the flat surface, it is restricted from moving in a direction parallel to the flat surface (for example, the width direction of the flat cable). Not a thing. Therefore, the flat cable may be inserted into the connector at an angle. If the flat cable is inserted obliquely to the connector, there is a possibility that a defect such as a short circuit or a malfunction may occur, which is disadvantageous.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a board 1720 on which an LED 1721 (electronic component) is mounted, a connector 1760 provided on the board 1720 and connected to the LED 1721, and a flat cable 1770 connected to the connector 1760 are provided. , A pachinko gaming machine 1 including, and having a guide portion 1714 that abuts at least one end of the flat cable 1770 in the width direction and defines the insertion direction of the flat cable 1770 into the connector 1760. The base member 1710 (direction defining means) is provided so that when the guide portion 1714 and the flat cable 1770 are in contact with each other, the flat cable 1770 is guided in the same direction as the insertion direction of the connector 1760, and the flat member is flat. It is characterized in that the portion where the cable 1770 is inserted into the connector 1760 is provided so as to be visible from the outside.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects in the flat cable 1770.
That is, by guiding the flat cable 1770 in the insertion direction of the connector 1760 by the guide portion 1714, the flat cable 1770 is obliquely inserted into the connector 1760 or the second movable body 1700 is moved in accordance with the movement of the connector. It can be prevented from falling out of 1760. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect such as a malfunction of the LED 1721.

Further, the flat cable 1770 is characterized by being provided with a plurality of power supply lines 1771 having different voltages.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a short circuit in the flat cable 1770.
That is, by appropriately guiding the flat cable 1770, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a short circuit between the power supply lines 1771 having a voltage difference.

Further, here, conventionally, in a pachinko machine, for example, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as that a game ball has passed a starting region provided in a game region in which a shot game ball can be rolled, a display device is established. Display control means is provided for performing control to variably display the symbol as the identification information on the display area of, and control for deriving and displaying the symbol that is variably displayed, and the symbol displayed and derived is a predetermined combination ( There is provided a big hit game state (so-called “big hit”) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display mode is achieved.

Further, in a pachinko machine, a technique has been proposed in which a flat cable is sandwiched between wiring guides so that the flat cable does not easily come off from the connector (see JP 2011-104294 A). Specifically, the wiring guide sandwiches the flat portion of the flat cable with other members. As a result, the wiring guide can restrict movement and bending of the flat cable in a direction perpendicular to the flat surface portion, and thus prevent the flat cable from easily coming off the connector.

However, in the conventional pachinko machine, the flat cable is sandwiched between the flat portions of the wiring guide. Therefore, if some tension is applied to the flat cable, the wiring guide may move. That is, the conventional pachinko machine described above is disadvantageous in that the holding force of the flat cable by the wiring guide may not be sufficient.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the board 1720 on which the LED 1721 (electronic component) is mounted, the base member 1710 (first member) to which the board 1720 is fixed, and at least a part of the board 1720 are provided. In the pachinko game machine 1 provided with a cover member 1740 (second member) for covering, a connector 1760 provided on the substrate 1720 and connected to the LED 1721, and a flat cable 1770 (wiring member) connected to the connector 1760. Therefore, the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740 are in contact with each other at a predetermined butting portion (the convex portion 1741a of the cover member 1740 and the concave portion 1713a of the base member 1710), and the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740 form a space. At least a part of the board 1720 and the connector 1760 is accommodated, and the flat cable 1770 is arranged along the predetermined wiring path from the connector 1760 to the outside of the space, and the flat cable 1770 is provided at the predetermined position of the wiring path. It is characterized in that it is fixed in a bent state by being sandwiched between the mating portions.

With this configuration, the holding force of the flat cable 1770 can be improved.
That is, by sandwiching the flat cable 1770 in a bent state, the flat cable 1770 can be firmly held. Further, it is not necessary to separately prepare a member for holding the flat cable 1770, and the existing members (the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740) can be used to hold the flat cable 1770.

In addition, a recess 1713a is provided in the abutting portion of the base member 1710,
A protrusion 1741a is provided on the abutting portion of the cover member 1740,
The flat cable 1770 is characterized by being sandwiched and fixed between the concave portion 1713a and the convex portion 1741a.

With this structure, the holding force of the flat cable 1770 can be improved with a simple structure.
That is, the flat cable 1770 can be fixed in a bent state only by sandwiching the flat cable 1770 between the concave portion 1713a and the convex portion 1741a.

Here, conventionally, the technology of a gaming machine provided with a rotatable circular base member and a reel sheet provided with a plurality of symbols and attachable to the base member has been publicly known. For example, it is as described in JP-A-2003-62151.

The gaming machine (slot machine) includes a base member (framework) having minute protrusions formed on the outer periphery thereof, and a reel sheet (reel band) having marks formed at one end in the length direction. The reel sheet is attached to the outer periphery of the base member using a double-sided tape. At this time, one end of the reel sheet in the length direction is aligned with the base member so that the mark is arranged on the side of the minute protrusion. Then, the reel sheet is gradually attached to the base member from one end to the other end in the length direction. As described above, the reel sheet is attached to the base member in a state where the position in the circumferential direction with respect to the base member is determined.

However, since the reel sheet is configured to be positioned on the base member only at one end in the length direction, it is difficult to position the reel sheet with high accuracy. For this reason, during the mounting of the reel sheet (or after the mounting), the position may shift and the mark may be realigned with the minute protrusion. At this time, since the reel sheet is peeled off from the base member and the marks are aligned again, the work of aligning the marks and attaching them to the base member becomes complicated. As described above, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the work of attaching the reel seat to the base member is inefficient.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and a problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the efficiency of work for attaching a reel sheet to a base member. .

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine 1 including a rotatable circular base member 2421 and a reel sheet 2422 that is provided with a plurality of symbols C and can be attached to the base member 2421. The reel sheet 2422 is provided with a plurality of cutouts 2422a to 2422c (position specifying means) serving as a guide for the mounting position of the base member 2421, and the first cutout 2422a (first position specifying means). To the second cutout portion 2422b (second position specifying means) in one direction in the rotation direction of the base member 2421 and the first cutout portion 2422b to the third cutout portion 2422c. The distance L2a in the direction is different.

With this configuration, the reel sheet 2422 can be accurately positioned with respect to the base member 2421. Further, it is possible to make one pattern in which the positions of all the cutout portions 2422a to 2422c and all the protrusion portions 2421a to 2421c match. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of the work of re-adjusting the mounting position after mounting the reel sheet 2422, and improve the efficiency of the work of mounting the reel sheet 2422 on the base member 2421.

Further, the base member 2421 is provided with a plurality of protrusions 2421a to 2421c (base member engaging portions) that can be engaged with the plurality of notches 2422a to 2422c, and the plurality of notches 2422a to 2422c are The reel sheet 2422 is configured to be engageable with the plurality of protrusions 2421a to 2421c, and the plurality of cutouts 2422a to 2422c and the plurality of protrusions 2421a to 2421c are engaged with each other to move the reel sheet 2422 to the base member 2421. Is formed at a specific position, and forms a deviation preventing means for preventing deviation of the reel sheet 2422 in the rotation direction of the base member 2421 when the base member 2421 rotates.

With this configuration, the reel sheet 2422 can be formed by simply engaging the first cutout portion 2422a to the third cutout portion 2422c with the first projection portion 2421a to the third projection portion 2421c. It can be easily positioned at 2421. Further, the reel sheet 2422 can be held at a specific position of the base member 2421 (it is difficult to shift after positioning).
Further, since the reel sheet 2422 can be surely rotated integrally (preventing relative rotation) when the base member 2421 is rotated, the predetermined symbol C can be surely displayed to the player.

Here, conventionally, a technique of a gaming machine including a production device having a rotatable circular base member and a reel sheet having a plurality of symbols and attachable to the base member has been publicly known. For example, it is as described in JP-A-2003-62151.

The gaming machine (slot machine) includes a base member (framework) having minute protrusions formed on the outer periphery thereof, and a reel sheet (reel band) having marks formed at one end in the length direction. The reel sheet is attached to the outer periphery of the base member using a double-sided tape. At this time, one end of the reel sheet in the length direction is aligned with the base member so that the mark is arranged on the side of the minute protrusion. Then, the reel sheet is gradually attached to the base member from one end to the other end in the length direction. As described above, the reel sheet is attached to the specific position of the base member so as not to be relatively rotatable.

However, it is difficult to efficiently attach the reel sheet to the base member because it is necessary to gradually attach the mark to the minute protrusion and then gradually attach the mark to the base member. Further, when the reel sheet and the base member are reused, it is necessary to remove the double-sided tape. As described above, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, double-sided tape is used to prevent relative rotation between the base member and the reel sheet (the reel sheet is prevented from being displaced from a specific position by rotation of the base member). For convenience, it was difficult to improve the detachability of the base member and the reel sheet.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and the problem to be solved is to prevent the reel sheet from being displaced from a specific position due to the rotation of the base member, and Provided is a game machine capable of improving the detachability with respect to a reel seat.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a pachinko machine including a rendering device 3400 having a rotatable circular base member 3421 and a reel sheet 3422 which is provided with a plurality of symbols C and can be attached to the base member 3421. In the gaming machine 1, the base member 3421 is provided with three protrusions 3421a to 3421c (base member engaging portions) that can be engaged with the reel seat 3422, and the reel seat 3422 has the base. Three notch portions 3422a to 3422c (reel seat engaging portions) that can be engaged with the member 3421 are provided, and the three notch portions 3422a to 3422c and the three protrusions 3421a to 3421c engage with each other. Positioning the reel sheet 3422 at a specific position of the base member 3421, and forming a deviation preventing means for preventing deviation of the reel sheet 3422 in the rotation direction of the base member 3421 when the base member 3421 rotates. To do.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the reel sheet 3422 from being displaced from a specific position due to the rotation of the base member 3421. Further, by engaging the three cutout portions 3422a to 3422c with the three protruding portions 3421a to 3421c, the positioning is performed and the attachment is performed without using the double-sided tape, so that the base member 3421 and the reel sheet 3422 are attached and detached. It is possible to improve the sex.

Further, at least a part of the base member 3421 is formed of a transparent member, and the reel sheet 3422 is housed so that the surface of the reel sheet 3422 is in contact with the inside of the base member 3421, and is applied to the reel sheet 3422. At least a part of the pattern C is visible from the outside of the base member 3421 through the transparent member.

With this configuration, the reel sheet 3422 can be pressed against the base member 3421 by the force of the reel sheet 3422 to open due to its elasticity (the force to expand). This makes it easy to fix the reel sheet 3422 to the base member 3421 without using the double-sided tape.

Here, conventionally, the technology of a gaming machine provided with a rotatable circular base member and a reel sheet provided with a plurality of symbols and attachable to the base member has been publicly known. For example, it is as described in JP-A-2003-62151.

The gaming machine (slot machine) includes a base member (framework) having minute protrusions formed on the outer periphery thereof, and a reel sheet (reel band) having marks formed at one end in the length direction. The reel sheet is attached to the outer periphery of the base member using a double-sided tape. At this time, one end of the reel sheet in the length direction is aligned with the base member so that the mark is arranged on the side of the minute protrusion. Then, the reel sheet is gradually attached to the base member from one end to the other end in the length direction. As described above, the reel sheet is attached to the base member in a state where the position in the circumferential direction with respect to the base member is determined.

However, it is difficult to efficiently attach the reel sheet to the base member because it is necessary to gradually attach the mark to the minute protrusion and then gradually attach the mark to the base member. Further, when the reel sheet and the base member are reused, it is necessary to remove the double-sided tape.

Therefore, a configuration is conceivable in which the reel sheet is rolled and accommodated in the base member, so that the reel sheet is attached to the base member without using the double-sided tape to improve the detachability of the base member and the reel sheet. However, in such a configuration, the end portion in the circumferential direction of the reel sheet may be deformed so as to warp inward in the radial direction of the reel sheet (see reel sheet 4422 shown in FIG. 125). As a result, a gap is created at the end of the reel sheet in the circumferential direction, which may impair the appearance.

As described above, in the gaming machine, it is difficult to improve the detachability of the base member and the reel sheet and keep the appearance.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and a problem to be solved by the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving detachability of a base member and a reel sheet and maintaining an aesthetic appearance. To do.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine 1 including a rotatable circular base member 4421 and a reel seat 4422 which is provided with a plurality of symbols C and can be attached to the base member 4421. The base member 4421 is made of a cylindrical transparent member having a hollow inside, and the reel seat 4422 is housed inside the base member 4421 such that the end of the reel seat 4422 partially overlaps. Further, a holding portion 4423c (holding member) for holding the end portion of the reel sheet 4422 is provided on the inner side of the base member 4421.

With this configuration, the reel sheet 4422 can be attached to the base member 4421 without using the double-sided tape. Thereby, the detachability of the base member 4421 and the reel seat 4422 can be improved.
In addition, the pressing portion 4423c can suppress deformation of the overlapping portion 4422d and prevent the gap S (see FIG. 125B) from being formed. Thereby, even when the light emitting unit 4430 (light emitting means) capable of irradiating the symbol C with light from the inner side of the reel sheet 4422 is provided, light leaks from the end portion in the circumferential direction of the reel sheet 4422. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the aesthetics.

Further, the pressing portion 4423c is configured by a member (left side mounting member 4423) different from the base member 4421.

With this configuration, the reel seat 4422 can be easily housed in the base member 4421. For example, if a holding portion is formed on the base member 4421, the left end portion of the reel sheet 4422 may be caught by the holding portion when the reel sheet 4422 is stored. On the other hand, when the pressing portion 4423c is formed on the left side attachment member 4423 (the member fixed to the base member 4421 after accommodating the reel seat 4422) as in the present embodiment, the reel seat 4422 is fixed to the base member. The pressing portion 4423c does not protrude from the base member 4421 when the housing portion 4421 is accommodated. Therefore, the pressing portion 4423c does not get in the way, and the reel sheet 4422 can be easily accommodated in the base member 4421.

Here, conventionally, the technology of a gaming machine provided with a gaming ball distribution device provided with an inflow port into which a gaming ball can flow is known. For example, it is as described in JP 2008-459A.

The game ball sorting device (sorting device) includes an upper tune, a lower tune, a lid, and the like. The upper clune has three holes (fall area and two general areas) into which game balls can enter, and divides the game balls into two passages. The upper-stage clune guides the game ball to the lower-stage clune in one of the two passages. The lower clune has three holes (fall area, probability variation area and general area) into which game balls can enter, and distributes the game balls to three passages. The lid part is formed so as to cover the upper tier and the lower tier. The lid is provided with an inflow port or the like that allows game balls to enter the upper clune.

In such a game ball distribution device, the flow of the game ball and the operation of a sensor (such as a sensor that detects that the game ball has entered the probability variation region) are generally confirmed in an inspection during manufacturing. In the inspection, for example, a game ball is entered from the inlet of the lid and the flow of the game ball guided to the upper lane is confirmed. At this time, the game ball is distributed to one of the two passages by the upper klune. In addition, the game ball guided from the upper tier to the lower tier (distributed to the one passage) is assigned to one of the three passages by the lower tune.

However, in such an inspection, the game ball may not be distributed to the passage to be inspected. In this case, the game ball is repeatedly entered until it is distributed to the passage to be inspected. In addition, if a game ball is easily inserted into a passage (for example, a passage having a sensor) to be inspected, there is a possibility that a person who commits a fraudulent act may make a mistake in the sensor. As described above, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is difficult to efficiently inspect the game ball distribution device.

The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and the problem to be solved is to improve the inspection efficiency of the game ball distribution device, and to prevent the sensor from being illegal after the game machine is installed in the game hall. Provided is a game machine that can be prevented from being played.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to another embodiment,
A game ball distribution device 5400 provided with an inflow port into which a game ball can flow, a detection means for detecting passage of a game ball distributed by the game ball distribution device 5400, and a first start of the detection means. A main control circuit 100 (specific game determination means) capable of executing a determination as to whether or not to shift to a specific game advantageous to the player based on detection of passage of a game ball by a mouth switch (specific detection means). A gaming machine equipped with,
The game ball sorting device 5400 can sort an inflowing game ball into a first passage (a passage that guides a game ball that has flown into the out port 5443 according to the first embodiment) on the back side (similarly). , Out port 5443) (first inflow port) and the inflowing game ball to a second passage different from the back side inflow port (also a passage for guiding the game ball flowing to the out port 5444). Another separable inflow port (similarly, the out port 5444) (second inflow port) and the game ball that has flowed in are different from the back side inflow port and the other back side inflow port. 3 front passage (also similarly, a passage for guiding the game balls that have flowed into the first starting port 5442), which can be distributed to the front side inlet (also the first starting port 5442) (third inlet), Including,
The first start port switch (specific detection means) is provided in the first passage (also a passage that guides the game ball that has flowed into the out port 5443),
An outlet switch (a detecting means different from the specific detecting means) is provided in the second passage (also a passage that guides the game balls flowing through the outlet 5444),
The detection means is not provided in the third passage (also, a passage for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the first starting opening 5442),
From the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400, the inflow port on the back side (also, the out port 5443) (first inflow port), and the inflow port on the other back side (also, the out port 5444) (second) And an opening 5416 through which a game ball can flow into the inflow port on the front side (similarly, the first starting port 5442) (the third inflow port),
The inflow port on the back side (also the out port 5443) (first inflow port) and the inflow port on the other back side (also the out port 5444) (second inflow port) are the inflow ports on the front side. It is provided at a position farther from the opening 5416 than the inlet (similarly, the first starting port 5442) (third inflow port).

With such a configuration, in the game ball distribution device 5400 according to another embodiment, the inspection efficiency of the game ball distribution device 5400 is increased, and the sensor is illegal after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall. Can be prevented.
More specifically, since the game balls can be inserted into the clune 5440 without being distributed by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420, the first passage 5501 (specifically, the first passage (first execution) The passage for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the out port 5443 according to the embodiment, the second passage (also for guiding the game ball that has circulated to the out port 5444), and the third passage (also for the first start). It is possible to inspect the passage)) that guides the game balls that have flowed into the mouth 5442. Thereby, for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is manufactured, it is possible to efficiently inspect the game ball distribution device 5400.
Further, when the opening 5416 is provided, a fraudulent person may enter a game ball through the opening 5416 using an illegal means and cause a sensor to detect the prize ball or an advantageous game state. There is a possibility that some kind of work may be performed on the sensor itself. However, as described above, the inflow port on the front side (also the first start port 5442) (third inflow port) having no sensor is the inflow port on the back side having the sensor (also the out port 5443) (the third port). The inflow port is located closer to the opening 5416 than the first inflow port and the other inward port (similarly, the out port 5444) (second inflow port). It's hard to cheat on the sensor. In this way, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the sensor by a fraudulent person after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment,
A movable accessory unit 57 (production device),
A sub control circuit 200 (production control means) capable of controlling the movable accessory unit 57 (production device),
An outlet switch 5473 (production detecting means) is provided in the second passage (also a passage that guides the game balls that have circulated through the outlet 5444).
The sub-control circuit 200 (production control means) can control the movable accessory unit 57 (production device) based on detection of passage of the game ball by the outlet switch 5473 (production detection means). It is a thing.

With such a configuration, even if the fraudulent player attempts to flow the game ball into the inflow port (also the out port 5443) (first inflow port) on the back side having the sensor, the player's benefit (specifically, Is flowing into the other back-side inlet (also the outlet 5444) (second inlet) which is an inlet for performance unrelated to winning a prize ball or obtaining an advantageous game state) This creates a situation in which it is possible to prevent fraud.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 82 Second movable accessory unit 1500 Base member 1600 First movable body 1700 Second movable body 1710 Base member 1713a Recessed portion 1714 Guide portion 1720 Substrate 1721 LED
1740 Cover member 1741a Convex part 1760 Connector 1770 Flat cable 1771 Power supply line 1800 Movement control means 1810 Motor 1820 Driving force transmission mechanism 1823 Second transmission gear 1824 Arm

Claims (2)

A plate-shaped first base member to which a plurality of movable bodies can be attached,
The first movable member mounted on one side of the first base member,
A second movable body attached to the other surface side of the first base member;
Movement control means for controlling movement of the first movable body and the second movable body,
Equipped with
The first movable body and the second movable body can be moved and controlled by the movement control means to a presentation position that is easily visible to the player and a standby position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.
The first movable body is arranged closer to the player than the first base member when the movement of the first movable body is controlled to the effect position,
The second movable body is arranged closer to the inside of the gaming machine than the first base member when the movement of the second movable body is controlled to the effect position ,
The first movable body is
A second base member,
A third movable body movably supported with respect to the second base member;
A drive source attached to the second base member, for moving the third movable body,
Equipped with
The drive source is
At least a portion is arranged at a position overlapping the first base member in the plate thickness direction of the first base member,
A gaming machine characterized by that. The first movable body is composed of a single movable body, and is arranged at the center of the first base member,
The second movable body is composed of a plurality of movable bodies, and is arranged as a pair of movable bodies at symmetrical positions.
The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images